REPRODUCTION
REPRODUCTION
The 1997 Chevrolet Blazer Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the “SIR” system.
2-1
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
3- 1
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tellsyou how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4- 1
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
5-1
Problems on the Road
This section tells what to do
if you have a problem while driving, such asa flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
6- 1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
8- 1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on ”Reporting Safety Defects” on page8- 10.
9- 1
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subjectin this ,manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
)
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem.
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name BLAZER are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you‘re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new
owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
C97 1 1 B First Edition
ii
We support voluntary
technician certification.
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
Natlonal Institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propribtaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en franpis chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1500 Bonhill Rd.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T IC7
“Copyright General Motors Corporation 1996
All Rights Reserved
About Driving Your Vehicle
Safety Warnings and Symbols
As with other vehiclesof this type, failureto operate this
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use abox and the wordCAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt
you if you were to ignore
the warning.
vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control oran
accident. Be sure to read the “on-pavement” and
“off-road” driving guidelines in this manual. (See
“Driving Guidelines” and “Off-Road Driving
with your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” in the Index.)
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when theyfirst receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about
the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
Index
I A CAUTION:
I
These mean there is something thatcould hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area,we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
A good place to lookfor what you need is the Index
in the back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical listof
what’s in the manual, and the page number where
you’ll find it.
iii
You will also find a circle
with a slash through itin
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this,” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
In the notice area,we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you whatto do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals,you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warningsin different colors or
in different words.
You’ll also see warning labelson your vehicle. Theyuse
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
iv
Vehicle Symbols
These are someof the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A
x
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
TURN
SIGNALS
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
FLASHER
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
COOLANT
TEMP
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
POWER
WINDOW
EATERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
A
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
BRAKE
t'
-I
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
FOG LAMPS
-
FUSE
$0
VENTILATING
FAN
1
b
-J
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
*
I
LIGHTER
(a)
HORN
SPEAKER
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
,\I/,
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
e,
FUEL
)a(
b
la
(@)
V
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
Two-Door Utility
vi
'
Four-Door Utility
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly.
You can also
learn about some things you shouldnot do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-8
1-12
1-13
1-13
1-20
1-26
1-26
1-26
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint (SIR) System
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Center Front Passenger Position
(4-Door Models)
1-28
1-31
1-34
1-35
1-37
1-44
1-47
1-47
1-48
Rear Seat Passengers
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults (4-Door Models)
Center Rear Passenger Position
(4-Door Models)
Children
ChiId Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust
them, and fold them up and down.
Manual Front Seat
I A CAUTION:.
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
ad,just a manual driver's seat while the vehicleis
moving. The sudden movement could startleand
confuse you, or make you push a pedal whenyou
orrlg when
don't want to. Adjust the driver's seat
the vehicle is not moving.
I Move the lever under the
x. '2
,
.
. .
I
I
I
-
front of the standard seat
toward the driver's
door to
unlock it. Slide the seat to
where you want it. Then
release-the lever and try to
move the seat with your
body to make sure the seat
is locked into place.
Move the lever under the
front of the easy entry seat
up to unlock it. Slide the
seat to where you want it.
Then release the lever and
try to move the seat with
your body to make sure the
seat is locked into place.
1-2
Manual Lumbar Support
If you have this feature,
there will be a knob on the
outside of the driverand
passenger bucket seats.
Turn the knob
counterclockwise to
increase lumbar support
and clockwise to decrease
lumbar support.
Power Driver’s Seat (Option)
If you have this feature, there willbe a control pad on
your driver’s seat.
To make the front of the seat moveup or down, use
control A.
To make the rear ofthe seat move up or down,use
control C.
Use control B to move the whole seat up, down, forward
or backward.
1-3
Power Lumbar Control (Option)
1-
If you have this control, it is
located on the side o f the
driver’s seat.
Press and hold the front of the control until you have the
desired lumbar support. To decrease lumbar support,
press the rear of the control.
1-4
Reclining Front Seatbacks
To adjust the seatback, lift
the lever on the outer side
Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it.
PulI up on the lever and the seat will go to an
upright position.
A CAUTION:
But don’t havea seatback reclinedif your vehicleis moving.
Sitting in a reclined position whenyour vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their jobwhen
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulderbelt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against yourbody. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lapbelt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle isin
motion, have the seatback upright. Thensit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.
1-5
Head Restraints
Head restraints are fixed on some models and adjustable
on others. Slide an adjustable head restraint up or down
so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of
your ears. This position reducesthe chance of a neck
injury in a crash.
Your adjustable head restraint may also be tilted forward
for greatercomfort.
To return the seatback to the upright position, push the
seatback all the way back until the latch catches. If the
seatback was reclined before beingfolded forward, it
will return to the reclined position.
I A CAUTION:
Seatback Latches
I
1-6
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
Easy Entry Seat (2-DoorModels)
Rear Seats
The right front seatof your vehicle makes it easy to get
in and out of the rear seat.
Your vehicle has a folding rear seatwhich lets you fold
the seatbacks down for more cargo space.
0
Tilt the right front seatback completely forward and
the whole seat will slide forward.
Move the seatback to its original position after
someone gets into the rear seat area. Then move the
seat rearward until it l o c k s .
A CAUTION:
If an easy entry right front seat isn’t locked, it
can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the person
sitting there could be injured. After you’ve used
it, be sure to push rearward on an easy entry seat
to be sure it is locked.
Tilt the seatback completely forward again to get out.
The rear seat release handles are in the upper center of
the rear of the seatbacks. Push back on the seatbacks as
you pull up on the handles.
To raise the seatbacks, just lift up the seatbacks and push
until they lock in the upright position.
Push and pull on the seatbacks to check that the latches
have locked in the upright position. If they haven’t, have
them fixed immediately.
1-7
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the Supplemental Intlatable Restraint (SIR),
x air bag system.
A CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit thingsinside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash,
you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
1-8
A CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride ina cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas aremore likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has alight that
comes on as a reminder to
buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
Why Safety BeltsWork
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild,and some crashes can be so
serious that evenbuckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them.
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
Take the simplest vehicle.Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.
After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
\.
-
1-9
I
t
Put someone on it.
1-10
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn‘t stop.
1
1
--
* "
lE&€d.*.L-r_
1
1
I
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
i
or the instrument panel
...
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
,
e
A
e:
A:
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That‘swhy
safety belts make such good sense.
1-12
You cwuld be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down.And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you c’au unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be
in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, butif you’re in an
-- you and
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number
of serious injuries
of less than 40 mph
and deaths occur at speeds
(65 km/h).
Safety belts arefor everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special thingsto know about safety
belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller
children and babies. Ifa child will be riding in your
vehicle, see thepart of this manual called “Children.”
Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’show to wear
it properly.
1 . Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can situp straight.
1-13
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don't Ict it Sct twisted.
Make w r c thc t - c l c w button on the buckle is
posiititmed 50 y o u would be able to unbuckle the
sat't'ty hclt quickly it' you ever had to.
5 . To make the lap part tight. pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up o n the shoulder belt.
The lap partof the belt should beworn low and snug on
the thighs. In a crash, this applies
the hips, j'ust touching
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be less
likely to slide underthe lap belt.If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These partsof the body are best ableto take belt
restraining forces.
The safety beltlocks if there's a sudden stop or a crash.
1-15
@
What’s wrong with this?
I A CAUTION:
L
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
L
A:
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won‘t give nzarly
as much protection this way.
1-16
What’s wrong with this?
1
A CAUTION:
You can be seriouslyinjured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the beltwould go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at thepelvic
bones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-17
e.''
What's wrong with this?
A CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. Ina crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren't as strong asshoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-18
What’s wrong with this?
~~
A CAUTION:
You can be seriously injuredby a twisted belt. In
a crash,you wouldn’t have the full widthof the
belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted,
make it straight so it can work properly, or ask
your dealer to fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-19
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR) System
This part explainsthe Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR) system or air bag system.
‘i
Your vehicle has an air bag for the driver.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:
A CAUTION:
You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
have an air bag. Wearing your safety belt during
a crashhelps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags are designed to work with
safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bags are
designed to work only in moderate to severe
crashes where the front of your vehicle hits
something. They aren’t designed to inflate at all
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
1-20
CAUTION: (Continued)
in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly whether or not there’s an airbag for
that person.
--
A CAUTION:
Air bags inflatewith great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too close to aninflating
air bag, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts
help keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with an
back as you can while still
air bag, and sit as far
maintaining controlof your vehicle.
AIR
BAG
There isan air bag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows
AIR BAG.
The system checks the air bag electrical system
for
malfunctions. The light tellsyou if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
1-21
How the Air Bag System Works
A CAUTION:
If something is between the driver and theair
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object intothat person. The path
of' an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don't
put anything between an occupant and the air
bag, and don't attach or put anything on or near
the steeringwheel hub.
Where is the air bag?
The driver's air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
1-22
When should an air bag inflate?
What makes an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflatein a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speedis above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level
is
about 14 to 18 mph (23 to 29 kmh). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design,so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your
vehicle strikes somethingthat will move or deform, such
as a parked car, the threshold levelwill be higher. The
air bag is not designed to inflatein rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle in
is a crash. The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part
of the air bag module inside the
steering wheel.
In any particular crash,no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determinedby the angleof the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and
near-frontal impacts.
How does anair bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel.
The air bag supplements the protection provided by
safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not
help you in many typesof collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motion not
is toward the air bag.
Air bags should neverbe regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts, and then onlyin
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
The air bag systemis designed to work properly undera
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially
on rough terrain.
As always, wear your safety belt. See “Off-Road
Driving” in the Index for more tips on off-road driving.
1-23
The air bag is designed to inflate only once. After it
inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your airbag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include the air bag module and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some peoplemay not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some componentsof the air bag module in the
steering wheel hub will be hot for a short time. The parts
of the bag that come into contact with you may be
warm, but not too hot to touch. Therewill be some
smoke and dust comingfrom vents in the deflated air
bag. Air bag inflation doesn’t preventthe driver from
seeing or from beingable to steer the vehicle. nor does it
stop people from leaving the vehicle.
A CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after anair bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
1-24
0
Your vehicle is equipped with it diagnostic module,
which records information about the air bag system.
The module records information about the readiness
of the system. when the sensors are activated and
driver’s safetybelt usage at deployment.
0
Let only qualified technicians work on yourair bag
system. Improper service can meanthat your air bag
system won’t work properly.See your dealerfor service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the cover for the driver’s air bag,
the bag may not work properly. You may have to
replace the air bag module. Do not open or break
the air bag cover.
Adding Equipment to Your Air
The air bag affects how your vehicle should be serviced. Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
There are partsof the air bag systemin several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer and theGM Service Manual have
information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag
system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and
Owner Publications” in the Index.
A CAUTION:
For up to two minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate
during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bagwhen
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape,
or yellow connectors. They are probably part of
the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures,and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
~
~
~~~~
~
~
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
Q:
If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the
front of my vehicle, will it keep the air bag from
working properly?
A:
As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
air bag from working properly in a crash.
@’
Is there anythingI might add to the frontof the
vehicle that could keep the air bap from
working properly?
A:
Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep theair bag system from
working properly. Also, theair bag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have any question about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. (The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure” in the Index.)
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don't wear safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it's more
likely that the fetus won't be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
The right front passenger's safety belt works the same
way as the driver's safety belt. See "Driver Position"
earlier in this section.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will
lock. I f it does, let it go back all the way and start again.
Center Front Passenger Position
(4-DoorModels)
1-26
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has a frontbench seat, someone can sit in
the center position.
When y o u sit i n rhr center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt. which has no retractor. To make
the belt longer. t i l t the latch plate and pull it along
the belt.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free endas shown until
the belt issnug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender’’ at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-27
Rear Seat Passengers
Lap-Shoulder Belt
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside PassengerPositions
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted. On four-door models, the
shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you
very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
1-28
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it
will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-29
m
And you'd be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If
you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. Theseparts of the body are best ableto
take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there's a sudden stop or a crash.
On four-door models, the safety belt also locks if you
pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
A CAUTION:
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones.
1-30
You can be seriously hurtif your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward
too much, which could increase injury.
The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides
for Childrenand Small Adults
(4-DOOr Models)
Four-door models have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides. This feature will provide added safety belt
comfort for childrenwho have outgrown child restraints
and for small adults. When installedon a shoulder belt,
the comfort guide pulls the belt away from
the neck
and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position in
the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfortfor
children who have outgrown child restraints and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed
on
the shoulder belts. Here’show to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt,just push the buttonon the buckle.
1-31
Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-32
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.
n
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide
on top.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat OutsidePassenger Positions”
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze thebelt
edges together so that you can take them out from the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip,
and then slide the guide onto the clip. Rotate theguide and
clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior
body, leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed.
1-33
Center Rear Passenger Position
@-DoorModels)
Lap Belt
When you sit in the center rear seating position, you
have a lap safety belt which has a retractor.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don't let it get twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
3. Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it.
1-34
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. In fact,
the law in every statein the United States and
in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained whilein a vehicle.
Smaller Children andBabies
I A CAUTION:
4. Position and release it the sameway as the lap part
of a lap-shoulder belt.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the
release button on the buckleis positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if
you ever had to.
Smaller childrenand babies should always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint
will say whether itis
the right type and size for your child. A very
young child’s hip bones are so small that a
regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, thebelt will likely be over the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatalinjuries. So, be sure that
any childsmall enough for one is alwaysproperly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.
1-35
CAUTION: (Continued)
heavy you can't hold it. For example, in a crash
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 2404b. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The babv would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure thebaby in an infant restraint.
1A
CAUTION:
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn't weigh much until a
crash. During a crash a baby will become so
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-36
Child Restraints
Where to Put the Restraint
Be sure the child restraintis designed tobe used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label sayingthat it meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Accident statisticsshow that children are safer
if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint ina rear seat outside position unless the
child is an infant and you’re the only adult in the
vehicle. In that case, you might want to secure the
restraint in the right front seat where you can keep an
eye onthe baby.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint.
You may
find these instructionson the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraintsuse the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraintto help reduce the chanceof personal injury.
The instructions thatcome with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to
do that.
Wherever you install it, be sureto secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
1-37
Top Strap
If your child restraint has it top strap, it should be
anchored. Anchor brackets for the rear outside seat
positions are located on the floor in the cargo area.
1-38
Don't use the front set of tie-down brackets. Anchor the
top strap to the rearmost bracket on the same side of the
vehicle as the child restraint.
Once you have the top strap anchored. you'll be ready to
secure the child restraint itself.
Securing a Child Restraint ina Rear
Outside Seat Position
You’ll be using thelap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. Pick up the latch plate, andrun the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goesin front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-39
I
5 . Pull the rest o f the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor t o set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down onthe chld restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint. justunbuckle the vehicle's
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
wilI move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-40
Center Seat Positions(4-Door Models)
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
Don’t use child restraints in these positions. The
restraints won’t work properly.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strapif the child restrainthas one.
1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the childrestraint.
1-41
I
r
.."
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-42
5 . Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure. If you’re using a
bucket seat, adjust the seat forward until the lap
portion of the safety belt holds the restraint firmly.
But don’t move it any more than needed to tighten
the lap belt.
I
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Larger Children
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
b
oet the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren't buckled up can be thrown out in
a crash.
Children who aren I ouckled up can strike other
people who are.
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle's safety belts.
1-44
-
/d
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properly spread theimpact forces. In a
crash, thetwo children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only one person at a time.
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but thechild is so small that the shoulderbelt is
very closeto thechild’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is sitting in a rear outside position of a
four-door model, see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” in the Index. If the child is so small that
the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s
face or neck. you might want to place the child in a
seat that has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one.
1-45
A CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder partis behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in
a crash the child might slide under the belt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal in,juries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips. just touching
the child‘s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-46
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder Iight
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
But if a safety beltisn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will orderyou an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coatyou will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you.The extender will
be just foryou, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it. and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit.To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safetybelt.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-47
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you've had a crash, do you need new belts'?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, a s they would be if worn
during a more severe crash. then you need new belts.
If you ever see alabel on the driver's safety belt buckle
that says to replace the buckle assembly. be sure to do
so. Then the new buckle assembly will be there to help
protect you in a collision.
If belts are cut or darnagea,replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn't being used at
the time of the collision.
I f an air bag inflates, you'll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in
this section.
CAUTION
ATTENTION
must be replaced.
1-48
1
&
NOTES
1-49
1-50
Section 2 FeaturesandControls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional featureson your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained arethe instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-6
2-9
2- 12
2-13
2- 13
2- 15
2- 17
2-18
2-2 1
2-23
2-23
2-23
2-29
2-30
2-33
Keys
Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Endgatekiftgate
Theft
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (Option)
Automatic Transmission Operation
Manual Transmission
Locking Rear Axle
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Four-wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
Transmission Models Only)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
2-33
2-34
2-34
2-35
2-36
2-38
2-45
2-49
2-63
2-63
2-64
2-67
2-72
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission
Models Only)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
(Automatic Transmission)
Windows
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Mirrors
Accessory Power Outlets (If Equipped)
Sunroof (If Equipped)
Universal Transmitter (If Equipped)
Instrument Panel
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Keys
A CAUTION:
Leaving young children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.
A child or others could be badly injured or
even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don't
leave the keys in a vehicle with young children.
d
2-2
This vehicle has one
double-sided keyfor the
ignition, endgate, spare tire
lock (two-door vehicles)
and door locks.It will fit
with either side up.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides
the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key
code number.
The key code number tells your dealeror a qualified
locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in
a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to have
new ones rnude cusily using this number. Your selling
dealer should also have this number.
I NOTICE:
Your vehicle has anumber of newfeatures
that can help prevent theft. But you canhave a
lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if youever
lock your keys inside. You may even have to
damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you
have extra keys.
Door Locks
You can use your key to unlock your door from
the outside.
To lock your door from the inside, slide the lever on
your inside door rearward.
A CAUTION:
Unlocked doors canbe dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doors andfall out. When a door is
locked, the inside handlewon't open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slowdown or stop your vehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren'tlocked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and you will be far
better off whenever you drive your vehicle.
--
--
I
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
You can use the Keyless Entry System, if you have
this option.
2-4
To unlock the door, slide the
lever on your inside door
forward. You will see a red
area on the lever.
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has power
door locks, the switch is
located on the armrest.
Press LOCK to lock all
the doors at once.
To unlock the doors, press the raised area next to the
key symbol.
On four-door models, the leveron eacn rear aoor worm
only that door’s lock.
Rear Door Security Lock
4s
With this feature, you can
lock the rear doorsso they
can’t be opened from the
inside by passengers.
Move the lockup to lock
the doors and down to
release the door locks.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
Keyless Entry System(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this option, you can lock andunlock
your doors and rear endgate from up to 30 feet (9 m)
away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied
with your vehicle.
Your Keyless Entry System operates on a radio
frequency subject toFederal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industryand
Science Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:
(1 ) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry and
Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received. including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-6
This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in
range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry
system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have
to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to
work, try this:
0
Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions
that follow.
e Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
e Check the location. Other vehiclesor objects may be
blocking the signal. Takea few steps to the leftor right,
and try again.
e If you're still having trouble. see your GM dealer or
a qualified technician for service.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Operation
Battery Replacement
When you press UNLOCK, the driver’s door and
endgate will unlock automatically.If you press
UNLOCK again within five seconds, all doors will
unlock. Press LOCK to lock all the doors.
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
Press the REAR button twice within3 1/2 seconds to
unlock and unlatch the rear glass. If your vehicle has
an automatic transmission, the transmission must be
in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).If your vehicle has
a manual transmission, you must engage the
parking brake.
Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded
to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen,a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. Whenthe dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle,
any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only two transmitters
matched to it.
You can tell the batteryis weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location.
If you have to
get closeto your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care
not to touch
any of the circuitry.Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
2-7
To replace the battery in the Keyless Entry transmitter:
L
&.
Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the security
method used by this system. The transmitter does not
send the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver
will not respond to a signal it has been sent previously.
This prevents anyone from recording and playing back
the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and simultaneously press and hold the LOCK
and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter for at least
five seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle,
see your dealer for service.
I . Insert a dime in the slot between the covers of the
transmitter housing near the key ring hole. Remove
the bottom by twisting the dime.
2 . Remove and replace the battery with a three volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+)
side down.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-8
EndgateLiftgate
A CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive
with the rear
window, endgate or liftgate open because carbon
monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle.
You can’t see or smell CO. It cancause
unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drivewith the rear window, endgate
or liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other
cable connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the rear window, endgate
or liftgate:
Make sure all windows are shut.
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system toits highest speed withthe setting on
VENT. That w
ill force outsideair into your
vehicle. See “Comfort Controis” in the Index.
If you have air outlets onor under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Endgate Mounted Spare
If your vehicle has an endgate-mounted spare tire
carrier, you must move the carrier arm out of the way to
open the glass.
Here’s how to move the arm:
d
I
1. Squeeze the release handle to free the carrier arm.
2 . Swing the carrier arm away from the endgate. You
may need to give it a slight tug.
3. To latch the carrier arm, swing it toward the endgate.
2-9
Endgate Release
To open a mechanical lock system from the outside,
insert the key into the lock and turn i t counterclockwise
to unlock the glass.
Reach inside the endgate
to lift the handle and open
the endgate.
The endgate and glass will automatically lock when shut.
To open a power lock system from the outside, insert the
key into the lock button and turn counterclockwise. All
doors will unlock.
You may also use the keyless entry system,or the power
door locks, if you're vehicle is so equipped.
When doors are unlocked,
press the button to open
the glass.
The endgate can be opened without a key if the driver's
door is unlocked. The endgate glass will not release if
the vehicle is in gear.
To lock a power lock system from the outside, insert
the key into the lock button and turn clockwise. All
doors will lock.
2-10
Liftgate Release
Remote Rear Glass Release
This button on the driver's
side of the steering column
allows you to release the
rear glass from inside
the vehicle.
REAR HATCH
Insert the key in the lock button and turn
counterclockwise. All doors will unlock. You may also use
the power lock switchesor the keyless entry system, if
your vehicle is so equipped. Use the handle to open the
liftgate. Press the buttonto open the glass whenthe liftgate
is closed. The glass won't release if the vehicle is in gear.
Emergency Release for Opening
EndgateLiftgate
I
1. Peel back or slit the carpet locally to expose the
access hole in the trim panel.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission,your shift
lever must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (,N) for the
release to work.
i
i 2.
If you have a manual transmission, either with or
without the Keyless Entry option, you must apply your
parking brake before you can open the endgate glass.
1
' ' ' 2
~
Use a thin screwdriver
to reach through the
access holes in both the
trim panel and the
hardware cover.
Pry the release lever
toward the passenger's
side until the glass latch
pops open.
3. Reattach the carpet securely.
-
4 4
Theft
Parking at Night
Vehicle theft is big business, especiallyin some cities.
Although your vehicle has a numberof theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
Park in a lighted spot, close allwindows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take
them with you.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don‘t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’II hear a tonereminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your steering wheel will be locked. and so will your
ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking
your key out also locks your transmission. And
remember to lock the doors.
2-12
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle. it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your ignition key? What if
you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
I NOTICE:
Use the key to turn the ignition switchto five different
positions.
~
~~
~
~
Your modern vehicle doesn’t needan elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long
run if you followthese guidelines:
0 Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or
less for thefirst 500 miles (805 km).
0 Don’t drive at any one speed
fast or
slow for the first500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
0 Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlierreplacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
0 Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towinga Trailer’’ in the Index for
more information.
--
C
--
A
E
ACCESSORY (A): ACCESSORY lets you use things
like theradio and the windshield wiperswhen the
engine is off. Push in the key and turn it toward you.
Your steering wheel will remain locked, just as it was
before you inserted the key.
2-13
NOTICE:
Don’t operate accessories in theACCESSORY
position for long periods of time. Prolonged
operation of accessories in the ACCESSORY
position could drain your battery andprevent
you from starting your vehicle.
LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering
wheel and transmission. It’s
a theft-deterrent feature.
You will only be able to remove your key when the
ignition is turned to LOCK.
OFF (C): This position lets youturn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel. Use OFF if you must have
your vehicle in motion while the engine isoff (for
example, if your vehicle is being towed).
RUN (D): This is the position for driving.
START (E):This starts your engine.
2-14
A CAUTION:
On manual transmissionvehicles, turning thekey
to LOCK will lock the steeringcolumn and result
in a loss of ability to steerthe vehicle. This could
engine
cause a collision. If you need to turn the
off while the vehicle is moving, turn thekey only
to OFF. Don’t press the key release button while
the vehicle is moving.
NOTICE^^'
_..
Y!’>
.‘sa
!-
If your key seemsstuck in LOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correctkey; if
so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and rightwhile youturn the
key hard. But turn thekey only withyour hand.
Using a tool to force it could break thekey or the
ignition switch. If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
Starting Your Engine
Key Release Button
ac
The key cannot be removed
from the ignition of manual
transmission vehicles
unless the key release
button is used.
9.-
To remove the key on manual transmission vehicles,
turn the key to the OFF position. Then turn the key to
the LOCK position while pressing the key release button
down at the same time. Pull the key straight out.
Automatic Transmission
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won't startin any other position -- that's a
safety feature.To restart when you're already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
I NOTICE:
Don't try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle
is moving. If you do, you couId damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when
your vehicle is stopped.
On automatic transmission vehicles, turn the key to
LOCK and pull i t straight out.
2-15
Manual Transmission
The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL (N).Hold the
clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your
vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way
down -- that’s a safety feature.
1 . Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in
START. If it doesn‘t start in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down for five more
seconds. or until it starts.
2-16
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.
When the engine starts, let go of the key and the
accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engineoperates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t.
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have yourvehicle towed, see
the partof this manual thattells how to do it
without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Engine Coolant Heater (Option)
In very cold weather, 0°F
(- 18O Cj or colder, the
engine coolant heater
can help.
You’ll get easier startingand better fuel economy during
engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be
plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting
your vehicle.
To Use the Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
A CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord asit was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Insteadof
trying to list everything here. we ask that you contact
your GM dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can giveyou the best advice for that
particular area.
~
2-17
Automatic Transmission Operation
Your automatic transmission may have a shift lever
located on the console between the seats or on the
steering column.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
If your vehicle is equipped with a coiunm shift lever, it
features an electronic shift position indicator within the
instrument cluster. This display must be powered
anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of
the PARK (P) position. This means that if your key is in
the OFF position, but not locked, there will be a small
current drain on your battery which could discharge
your battery over a period of time. If you need to leave
your key in the ignition in the OFF position for an
extended period, it is recommended that you disconnect
the battery cable from the battery to prevent discharging
your battery.
PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you start your engine because your
vehicle can‘tmove easily.
2-18
A CAUTION:
It is dangerous toget out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave yourvehicle when the engineis
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your
vehicie won’t move, even when you’re onfairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever toPARK (P).
If you have four-wheel drive, yourvehicle will
be free to roll even if your shift lever is
in PARK (P) if your transfercase is in
NEUTRAL (N). So, be sure the transfer case is in
a drive gear, two-wheel high (2HI) orfour-wheel
high (4HI) orfour-wheel low (4LO) not in
NEUTRAL (Nj. See “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in
the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing
a Trailer” in the Index.
---
--
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) range before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has a brake-transmission
shift interlock.You have to fully apply your regular brakes
before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition
key is in the RUN position. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever-- push the shift
lever all the way into PARK (P) (press the button in on the
console shift lever)as you maintain brake application.
Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish. See
“Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in the Index.
REVERSE (R):Use this gear toback up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE(R)while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage your
transmission. Shift to REVERSE (R) only
after your vehicle isstopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out
of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice orSnow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels.To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
I A CAUTION:
Shifting outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)while
your engine is “racing” (running athigh speed) is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmlyon the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or
objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
I NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the
engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
2-19
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (0):
This position is for
normal driving. If you need more power for passing,
and you’re:
Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@jshould not be used
when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load. driving on
steep hills, or for off-road driving. Select DRIVE (D)
when operating the vehicle under any of theseconditions.
DRIVE (D): This position is also used for normal
driving, however it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@). You
should use DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, driving on steep hills or winding roads or
for off-road driving.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakes off and on.
2-20
You can also use SECOND (2) for starting your vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
selector lever is put in FIRST ( 1 ) while the vehicle is
moving forward, the transmission won’t shift into
FIRST (1) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
I NOTICE:
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if youwere stuck in
very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there withonly the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transmission. Use your brakes or shift into
PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position
on a hill.
Manual Transmission Operation
5-Speed
Here’s how to operate your transmission:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal andshift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST(1) when you’re going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete
stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST(1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into
FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then,
slowly letup on the clutch pedal asyou press the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD, FOURTH AND FIFTH (3,4 and 5): Shift
into THIRD(3),FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same
way you do for SECOND ( 2 ) . Slowly letup on the
clutch pedalas you press the acceleratorpedal.
This is your shift pattern.
To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shiftto
NEUTRAL (N).
2-21
NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you start or
idle your engine.
Shift Light
If you have a manual
transmission, you have a
SHIFT light.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal, wait
about six seconds, then shift into REVERSE (R). Then
let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the
accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while
your vehicle is moving could damage
your transmission.
Use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, for
parking your vehicle.
SHIFT
This light will show you when to shift to the next higher
gear for bestfuel economy.
When this light comeson, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions let
you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and
shift when the light comes on.
While you accelerate. it is normal for the light to go on
and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift.
2-22
A CAUTION:
If you skip more than one gear when you
downshift, you couldlose control of your vehicle.
And you could injure yourself or others. Don’t shift
down more than one gear when you downshift.
All-Wheel Drive(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive,your engine’s
driving power is sent to all fourwheels for extra
traction. This is like four-wheel drive,but there is no
lever or switch to engage or disengagethe front axle.
It is fully automaticand adjusts itself as needed for
road conditions.
Four-wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has four-wheel driveand is equipped
with a manual transmission, disregard the shift light
when the transfer case is in 4LO.
Locking Rear Axle
If you have this feature, your rear axle can give you
additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It
works like a standard axle most of the time, but when
one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does,
the locking feature will allow the wheel with traction to
move the vehicle.
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To shift out of two-wheel drive and into
four-wheel drive, move the transfer case shift lever to
4HI or 4LO. You should use 2HI for most normal
driving conditions.
NOTICE:
Driving in the 4HI or 4LO positions for a long
time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the
life of your vehicle’s drivetrain.
2-23
Manual Transfer Case
An indicator light near the lever shows you the transfer
case settings:
If your four-wheel-drive vehicle has the manual transfer
case, the transfer case shift lever is on the floor next to
the driver. Use this lever to shift intoand out of
four-wheel drive.
2HI
0
4HI
0
N SET PARK BRAKE
4LO
2-24
The front axle portionof the diagram on the indicator
will light up when you shift into four-wheel drive. A
slight delay between shiftingand the pattern’s lighting is
normal. If the pattern does not lightup, or if the front
axle lights do not go outafter you shift out of
four-wheel drive, have your dealer check your system.
Turn the INT LIGHTS switch locatedto the right of
your headlamp switchto dim your transfer case
indicator light when your headlamps or parking lamps
are on. This will also cause your instrumentpanel lights
to dim.
2HI: This setting is for driving inmost street and
4LO: This setting also engagesyour front axle to give
you extra traction and provides extra gear reduction.
You may never need 4LO. It sends the maximum power
to all four wheels. You might choose 4LO if you were
driving off-road in sand, mud or deep snow and
climbing or descending steephills.
You can shift from 2HI to 4HI orfrom 4HI to 2HI while
the vehicle is moving. Do not press the transfer case
shift leverbutton when shifting from 2HI to 4HI or
from 4HI to 2HI.
To shift your transfer case intoN SET PARK BRAKE:
highway situations. Your front axle isnot engaged in
two-wheel drive.
1. Stop the vehicle and shift your transmission into
NEUTRAL (N).
4HI: This setting engages your front axle to help
drive your vehicle. Use 4HIwhen you need extra
traction, such as on snowyor icy roads, or in most
2. Set the parking brake. Your vehicle can roll unless
the brakes are applied.
off-road situations.
3. Pull the transfer case shift leverinto N SET
PARK BRAISE.
N SET PARK BRAKE: Shift to this neutral setting
only when your vehicle needs to be towed.
2-25
To shift intoor out of 4LO:
1. The vehicle must be moving less than 3 mph
(4.8 k m h ) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N)
for an automatic transmission.For a manual
transmission, the clutch pedal must be engaged.
The preferred method for shiftinginto or out of 4LO
is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to
3.2 km/h).
Electronic Transfer Case (U' Equipped)
.
.
...
If your four-wheel-drive
vehicle has the electronic
transfer case,the transfer
case switches are above
2. Press the transfer case shift button and shift in one
continuous motion.
Don't pause in N SET PARK BRAKE as you shift into
or out of 4L0, or your gears could clash.
Remember that driving in 4HI or 4LO may reduce fuel
economy. Also. driving in four-wheel drive on dry
pavement could cause your tires to wear faster and
make your transfer case harder to shift and reduce
powertrain longevity.
Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive. You can choose among three driving settings:
2HI: This setting is for driving in most street and
highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. When this lamp is lit, it is about
one-half as bright as the others.
4HI: This setting engages your frontaxle to help drive
your vehicle. Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such
as on snowy or icy roads, or in most off-road situations.
2-26
4LO: This setting also engagesyour front axle togive
you extra traction.You may never need 4LO. It sends
the maximumpower to all fourwheels. You might
choose 4LO if you were driving off-road in sand, mud
or deep snowand climbing or descending steep hills.
Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting
you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights
do not come on, you should take your vehicle in for
service. An indicator light will flash while shifting. It will
remain illuminated when the shift is completed.
Shifting from 2HI to 4HI
Press and release the 4HI switch. This canbe done at
any speed, and the front axle will lock automatically.
Shifting from 4HI to 2HI
Press and release the 2HI switch. This canbe done at
any speed. and the front axle will unlock automatically.
Shifting from 2HI or JHI to 4LO
To shift tiom ZHI
or -!HI to 4L0, the vehicle must be
stopped or mo\fing less than 3 mph (4.8 k m k ) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) in vehicles equipped with
an automatic transmission or the clutch pedal engaged in
vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. The
preferred method for shifting into4LO is to have your
vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press
and release the 4LO switch. You must wait for the
4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain
illuminated before shifting your transmission into
gear or releasing the clutch pedal.
If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving,the 4LO indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 k m k ) and
the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch
pedal engaged.
On automatic transmission equipped vehicles,if your
transfer case doesnot shift into4L0, your transmission
indicator switch may require adjustment. With your
transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the
4LO switch. While the 4LO indicator light is flashing,
shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the
4LO indicator light remains illuminated before shifting
your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4L0,
but you should take your vehicle in for serviceto restore
normal operation.
2-27
Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI
To shift from 4LO to 4HI or 2H1, your vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 k m h ) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal
engaged. The preferredmethod for shifting out of
4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to
3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI switch. You must
wait for the 4HI indicator light to stop flashing and
remain illuminated before shiftingyour transmission
into gear or releasingthe clutch pedal.
If the 4HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear
and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light will flash for
30 seconds but not complete the shift unless the
vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and
the transmission is in NEUTRAL ( N ) or the clutch
pedal engaged.
2-2s
On automatic transmission equipped vehicles, if your
transfer case does not shift into 4H1, your transmission
indicator switch may require adjustment. With your
transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the
4HI switch. While the 4HI indicatorlight is flashing,
shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the
4HI indicator lightremains illuminated before shifting
your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4HI.
but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore
normal operation.
Parking Brake
To set the parkingbrake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push downthe parking brake
pedal with your left foot. If the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light will come on.
To release the parkingbrake hold the regular brake
pedal down.
.
.
Pull the BRAKE RELEASE
lever. It is located on the
bottom driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
NOTICE:
r
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakesto overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you couldalso damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
2-29
Column Shift Lever
Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
Transmission Models Only)
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
A CAUTION:
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position ‘likethis:
~~
It can be dangerous toget out of your vehicle
. ,. if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehiclecan roll.
If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly.You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that
follow. If you have fourwheel drive with a manual
transfer case shift lever and your transfer case is
in NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P).So, be sure
the transfercase isin a drive gear not in
NEUTRAL (N). If you’re pulling a trailer, see
“Towing a ’Iltailer” in theIndex.
I
--
2-30
0
Pull the lever toward you.
Console Shift Lever
F
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shtft lever into PARK (P) position like this:
0
Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer
case shift lever, be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear -- not in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle isin
PARK (P).
Hold in the button on the lever.
Push the lever all the way toward the front of
the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave
your vehcle with the key, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission
Models Only)
I A CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your
vehicle with the
engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. If you have four-wheel
drive with a manual transfer case shift lever and
your transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N), your
vehicle will be free to roll,even if your shift lever
is in PARK (P). So be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear not in NEUTRAL (N). And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, itcould
overheat and even catchfire. You or others could
be injured. Don't leave yourvehicle with the
engine running unlessyou have to.
--
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
2-32
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you've moved the shift lever into the PARK (P)
position, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see
if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)
without first pulling it toward you (or pressing the
button on a console shift lever). If you can, i t means that
the shift lever wasn't fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you don't shift your
transmission into PARK (PI properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force onthe parlung pawl in the
tr'msmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
Icver out of PARK (P). This is called "torque lock." To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver's seat.
To find out how, see "Shifting Into PARK (P)" in
the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
I f torque lock does occur. you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
y o u can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Outof PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Transmission Models Only)
Your vehicle has a brake-transmission shift interlock.
You have to fully apply your regular brake before you
can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in the
RUN position. See “Automatic Transmission Operation”
in the Index.
Before you get out of your vehicle, turnoff your engine,
put your manual transmission in REVERSE (R) and
firmly apply the parking brake.
If you cannot shift outof PARK (P), ease pressureon
the shift lever -- push the shift lever allthe way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you want (you must
press the shift leverbutton if you have the console
shift lever).
If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case
shift lever, be sure your transfer case is in a drive gear.
Your vehicle could roll if it isn’t.
If you are parking on ahill, or if your vehicle is pulling
a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
If you ever hold the brake pedal downbut still can’t
shift outof PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drivegear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-33
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
A CAUTION:
IA
CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle andignite. Don't park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
2-34
Engine exhaust cankill. It contains thegas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can't see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming ini f
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in collision.
a
Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the roador over
road debris.
a Repairs weren't done correctly.
0 Your vehicle or exhaust system had
been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaustis coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
0 Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked (Automatic Transmission)
It’s better not topark with the engine running. But if
ever have to, here are some things to know.
A CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the air system control
off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle (seethe earlierCaution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle evenif
the fan switchis at the highest setting. One place
this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” in theIndex.)
--
9-
I A CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shiftlever is not fully in PARK(P)with the
parking brakefirmly set. Your vehiclecan roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle whenthe engineis
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’reon fairly
level ground, always set your parkingbrake and
move the shiftlever to PARK(P).
If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case
shift lever and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N),
your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever
is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear -- not in NEUTRAL (N). Always set your parking
brake. Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
won’t move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see ”Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
2-35
Windows
Manual Windows
Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower your
manual side door windows.
Power Windows (If Equipped)
If you have the optional power windows, the controls
are on each of the side doors. Your power windows will
only work when the ignition has been turned to RUN.
The driver's door has a switch for the passenger
windows as well.
Press the side of the switch with the down arrow to
lower the window.
Press the side of the switch with the up arrow to raise
the window.
Express-Down Window
The driver's window switch has an express-down feature
that allows you to lower it without holding the window
switch. Hold the driver's window switch down for more
than a half a second to activate the express-down feature.
Lightly tap the switch to open the window slightly.The
express-down feature can be interrupted at any time by
pressing the up arrow end of the switch.
2-36
Lockout Switch
Swing-Out Windows (2-Door Only)
If your vehicle has rear
swing-out windows, unlatch
them at theirclasps and
push out on the glass to
open them.
When you close the window, be sure the latch catches.
Four-door vehicles have a lockout feature to prevent
passengers from operating power windows.It is located
on the driver's door. Press LOCK to activate this feature.
Press NORM and the windows return to normal operation.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on the
steering wheel pad.
2-37
Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
If you have the tilt steering
wheel. you should adjust
the steering wheel before
you drive.
I
You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs
more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a
comfortable level. then release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
The level- on the left side of the steering column
includes your:
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
0
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
2-38
’krn and Lane ChangeSignals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions.These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished,the lever will return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn
or lane change.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, checkthe fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers’’ in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, a differentturn signal flasher is used.
With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will flash
even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front
and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they
are working.
Headlamp Highkow Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low-beam to high or
high to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way
toward you. Then release it.
To signal a lane change. just raise or lower the lever
until the ;lrrocv starts to tlash. Hold it there until you
complete your 1mc change. The lever will return by
itself when you rclt.ast: i t .
1
When the high beams are
on,.this indicator light on
the instrument panel will
also be on.
As you signal ;1 turn or LI lane change, if the arrows don’t
flash but just stay 011. ;I signal bulb may be burned out
and other drivers w o n ‘ t see your turn signal.
2-39
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield
wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they're frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield Washer
At the top of the multifunction lever there's a paddle
marked with the windshield washer symbol and PUSH.
To spray washer fluid on the windshield, press the
paddle. The wipers will clearthe window and then
either stop or return to your preset speed.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will
stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes. hold the
band on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer to LOW. the shorter the delay.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away
from you to the LOW position. For high-speed wiping,
turn the band further, to HIGH. To stop the wipers.
move the band to the OFF position.
2-40
I A CAUTION:
In freezing weather,don't use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid canform ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
Rear Window WasherIWiper
WASH
The rear window wiper operates with a constant five
second delay when the rear wiper switch is in the ON
position. If the rear glass is opened, the wiper arm
will automatically park on the endgate. When the
glass is completely closed, the wiper will resume the
delay mode.
To wash the window, press and hold ON. The wipers
will continue to work after you release the switch.
Press OFF to turn the wiper off.
REAR WIPER
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield
washer. If you can wash your windshield but not your
rear window, check your fluid level.
This switch is located on the instrument panel.
2-41
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
With cruise control, you can
maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more
without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can
really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 krdh).
If you have an automatic transmission and you apply
your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
If you have a manual transmission and you apply yourbrakes or push the clutch pedal, the cruise control will
shut off.
2-42
A CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou
can't drive safely at a steady speed.
So,
don't use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless
wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don't
use cruise control on siippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
1A
Suppose you set your cruise controlat a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control. But you don't
need to reset it.
CAUTION:
If you leave yourcruise control switch on when
you're not usingcruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don't want to. You
could be startled and even losecontrol. Keep
the cruise control switch OFF until you want to
use it.
I
Once you're going about
25 mph (40 k m h ) or more,
you can move the cruise
control switch fromON
to WA for about a half
a second.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2 . Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the SET button
at the end of the lever
and release it.
You'll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
Remember, if you hold the switch at R/A longer than a
half a second,the vehicle will keep going faster until
you release the switch or apply the brake. You could be
startled and even lose control.So unless you want to go
faster, don't hold the switch at WA.
2-43
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Controi
Using Cruise Controlon Hills
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed. load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills. you may want to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course. applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control.Many drivers find this to
be too rnuch trouble and don't use cruisecontrol on
steep hills.
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Press the button at the end of the lever, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. You'll now
cruise at the higher speed.
Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want. and
then release the switch. (To increase your speed in
very small amounts. move the switch to R/A. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.)
Reducing SpeedWhile Using Cruise Control
Press in the button at the end of the lever until you reach
the lower speed you want. then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, press the button
for less than a half a second. Each time you do this.
you'll go 1 mph ( I .6 kndh) slower.
Passing Another VehicleWhile Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal tu increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal. your vehicle \vi11 slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
2-44
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch
pedal, if you have a manual transmission.
Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn oft' the cruise control or the ignition.
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Press the top switchwith the parking lamps symbol on it
to turn on:
Exterior Lamps
: aD
0
Parking Lamps
0
Sidemarker Lamps
0
Taillamps
0
License Plate Lamps
0
Instrument Panel Lights
0
Transfer Case Indicator Light (if you have one)
'
.-
.
.
I
.
-
*
Press the bottom switch with the master lampssymbol on
it to turn on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps.
Press the side of the switch marked OFF to turn off
your lamps.
The switches are on the left side of your instrument panel.
2-45
Lamps On Reminder
A reminder tone will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are turned on and your ignition is in OFF,
LOCK or ACCESSORY. To turn the tone off, press the
OFF switch.
Daytime RunningLamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions. but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come onat
reduced brightness when:
the ignition is on,
the headlamp switch is off and
the parking brake is released.
2-46
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on.
The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, your DRL indicator light is a
reminder to turn your headlamp switch on. The other
lamps that come on with your headlamps will also
come on.
When you turn the headlamp switch off, the regular
lamps will go off, and your headlamps will change to
the reduced brightness of DRL.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking
brake. The DRL will stay off until you release the
parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
I
. .
$0OFF
FOG LAMPS
Use your fog lamps for better vision
in foggy or misty
conditions. Your parking lamps orlow-beam headlamps
must be on foryour fog lamps to work.
The fog lamp switch is on the instrument panel under
the lamps switches. Pressthe side of the switch with the
fog lamp symbolto turn the fog lamps on. Press OFF to
turn them off. A light will glow in the switch when the
fog lamps are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps in
the dark without turningon your headlamps.
Fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off,
the fog lamps will come on again.
Interior Lamps
Brightness Control
Turn the switch next to the headlamp switch
up to
make your instrument panel and transfer case lights
brighter. Turn the switchall the way up to turn on the
interior lamps.
Front Reading Lamps (If Equipped)
Press the buttonnear each lamp on the overhead console
to turn the reading lamps on and off. The lamps can be
swiveled to point in the desired direction.
If you have the miniconsole, press the lens on each
reading lamp to turn it on or off.
2-47
Front Map Lamps (If Equipped)
Dome Lamps
If your vehicle has optional front map lamps, they
are located on the inside rearview mirror. They will
automatically come on for approximately 20 seconds
when either front door is opened or unlocked with the
Keyless Entry System, if so equipped. or until the
ignition key is turned to RUN or ACCESSORY. The
lamps will also stay on for approximately 15 seconds
after you exit the vehicle.
The rear dome lamp has a switch that lets you turn it on
from the rear of the vehicle.
They will also stay on for I5 seconds when the INT
LIGHTS switch on the instrument panel is turned on
then off, while the ignition is off.
You can also turn the lamps on and off by pressing the
switch near each lamp.
Press the side of the switch with the lamp symbol to turn
on the front and rear dome lamps. Pressing the other side
of the switch will turn the cargo area dome lamp off,
even when the endgate or liftgate and doors are open.
2-48
Mirrors
Outside Manual Adjust Mirror
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side
of your vehicle.
You can fold them before enteringa car wash. Pull the
mirrors in toward the vehicle. Push the mirrors back out
when finished.
Power Remote Control Mirror
The control is located on the
driver's door armrest.Turn
the control to L or R to
choose the mirror, then
press the arrows on the
outside switch ring to adjust
the mirror.
Press the tab under the mirror to reduce glare from
headlamps behind you.
2-49
Convex Outside Mirror
Overhead Console(If Equipped)
Your passenger’s sidemirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
A CAUTION:
A convex mirrorcan make things(like other
vehicles) look farther away than they reallyare.
If you cut too sharplyinto the right lane,you
could hit a vehicleon your right. Checkyour
inside mirroror glance over your shoulderbefore
changing lanes.
Storage Compartments
Glove Box
To open your glove box, squeeze the lever at the top of
the glove box and lower the door. Two cup depressions
are provided for your convenience. but the glove box
should not be open while driving.
2-50
The overhead console includes reading lamps, a
compartment for a garage dooropener, a temperature
and compass display and a storage compartment
for sunglasses.
Reading Lamps
Installing a Garage Door Opener
If you have a garage door opener, the front overhead
compartment canbe used to conveniently store
the opener.
To install the garagedoor opener, first openthe
compartment doorby pressing the latch forward.
Peel the protective
backing from the hook
and loop patch.
I
The lamps can alsobe swiveled to point in the
desired direction.
‘I
Press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener,
as close to the center of the opener as possible.
Center the garage door opener activation
button over
the console doorbutton and press the opener firmly
into place.
2-51
Now, with the Compartment
door closed, press the
button again to make sure
the garage door opener
operates properly.
The pegs inside the
compartment door are used
to make sure the button on
the compartment door will
contact the control button
on the garage door opener.
A
I
Add one peg at a time until the garage door opener
operates with the compartment door closed when you
press the button.
2-52
With the garage door opener positioned properly and the
right number of pegs in place, you should only have to
press the button slightly to operate the opener. Adjust the
position of the garage door opener and add or remove
pegs, as needed, until the opener operates properly.
Temperature and Compass Display
Turn the display on or off by pressing the ON/OFF
switch. Display the temperature in either degrees
Fahrenheit (English) or Celsius (metric) by pressing the
U S N E T switch.
Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle,
the temperature indicated will be the last outside
temperature recorded with the ignition on.
If the outside temperature is 37 OF (3 O C) or lower when
you turn on the ignition, ICE will appear on the display.
This is a warning to the driver that road conditions may
be icy, and that appropriate precautions should be taken.
The outside air temperature and the compass are
displayed at the front of the overhead console. The
control switches are located to the left of the display.
The compass is self-calibrating. so it does not need to
be manually set. However, when your vehicle is new,
the compass may function erratically. If it does, CAL
(Calibration) will appear on the display. To correct the
problem, drive in a complete 360" circle three times,
and the compass will function normally.
2-53
2. Press and hold both the ON/OFF and the USMET
switches. The displaywill go off.
3. After five seconds, VAR CAL will appear on the
display. When it does, release both buttons.
4. Press USMET until your zone number appears on
the display.
5. Press ON/OFF to enter your zone number. Your
variance is now set.
Driver Information System
(If Equipped)
This system displays the outside air temperature,
compass direction and trip information in the
overhead console.
Variance is the difference between magnetic north and
geographic north. In some areas, the difference between
the two can be great enough to cause false compass
readings. If this happens, follow these instructions to set
the variance for your particular location:
1. Find your location on the zone map. Note your
zone number.
2-54
The USMET (United Statedmetric) button allows you to
switch the display between the English and metricsystem.
The MODE button can be used to toggle between three
modes of operation: OFF?COMPEEMP and TRIP.
OFF: This turns the system off.
COMP/TEMP: The display provides the outside
temperature and one of eight compass readings to
indicate the direction the vehicle is facing.
The compassis self-calibrating, so it does not need
to be manually set. However, if C (Calibration) is
displayed, the compasswill need to be calibrated.
You may also place the compassin a noncalibrated
mode by pressing and holding the MODE andUSMET
buttons simultaneously whilein the COMP/TEMP
mode. After about 10 seconds, the compass will display
C and you can release the buttons. Drive the vehiclein
a complete360" circle threetimes at a speedof less
than 5 mph (8 km/h), and the compasswill function
normally. Once the calibration is complete, the display
will return to a compass reading.
Variance is the difference between magnetic north and
geographic north. In some areas,the difference between
the two canbe great enoughto cause false compass
readings. If this happens, follow these instructions to
set the variance foryour particular location:
1. Find your location on the zone map earlier in this
section. Note your zone number.
2. Press and hold both the MODE and the US/MET
buttons in the COMPREMP mode.
3. After five seconds,the compass will acknowledge
the variation mode by displaying the current zone
number. When it does, release both buttons.
4. Press USMET until your zone number appears
on the display.
5. Press MODE to enter your zone number. Your
variance is now set and the display will return to
the COMP/TEMPmode.
TRIP: Once in the TRIP mode, pressing the
MODE button will step you through the following
TRIP functions:
AVG ECON: The average fuel economy since the
last reset is displayed.
INST ECON: Instantaneous fuel economy for the
last secondof driving is displayed.
RANGE: The display indicates the estimated
distance that can be travelled with the remaining
fuel in the tank, based on the fuel economy forthe
last few hours of driving.
FUEL USED: The fuel used since the last reset
is displayed.
AVG SPEED: The average speed since the last
reset is displayed.
To reset the trip computer, press the MODE and
USMET buttons simultaneously for at least two
seconds. All functions will be displayed for half a
second once the system is reset. Reset can only be
performed in the AVG ECON, FUEL USED and
AVG SPEED modes. All three modes are reset
simultaneously.
2-55
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
Front Storage Area
....
56:
The console has a sunglasses storage compartment.
Door Storage
You will find a storage compartment on each of the
front doors.
Four-door models have storage pockets and cupholders
on rear doors.
2-56
Tf your vehicle has this console compartment, squeeze
the front lever while lifting the top to open it. You
can store cassettes in the slots i n the front of the
compartment. If you have a compact disc player.
you may store compact discs inside the console.
Convenience Net (If Equipped)
If your vehicle hasthe center armrest compartment, lift
the cover to expose the storage area which includes slots
for cassettesand a coinholder.
A storage compartment under your radio may be used to
hold small items.
You may havea convenience net in the rearof your vehicle to
help keep small items, like gloves and light
clothing in place
during sharp turns or quick stops and starts.
The net is not designed to retain these items during
off-road use. The net is not for larger, heavier items.
The convenience net is anchored to the endgate door.
Attach the upper loops to the retainers on either side of
the endgate opening (the label should be in the upper
passenger side corner, visible from the rear of vehicle).
Attach the lower hooks to the rear cargo tie downs on
the floor.
Roll-Up Cargo Cover (If Equipped)
Cargo Tie Downs
If you have the optional cargo cover, you can use it to
cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch the posts
into the sockets on the inside trim panel on the
passenger's side of the vehicle to secure it.
I A CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover couldbe
thrown about the vehicle duringa collision
or sudden maneuver.You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover,always store it
outside of the vehicle. When youput it back,
always be sure that itis securely reattached.
2-58
There are four cargo tie downs in the rear that allow
you to strap cargo in and keep it from moving inside
the vehicle.
Luggage Carrier (If Equipped)
A CAUTION:
If you try to carrysomething on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than theluggage
carrier like paneling, plywood, a mattress, and
so forth the wind can catch itas you drive
along. This can causeyou to lose control. What
you are carryingcould be violently torn off, and
this could cause you or other drivers
to have a
collision, and of course damage yourvehicle. You
may be able to carrysomething like thisinside.
But, never carry something longeror wider than
the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle.
---
The luggage carrierhas slats, side rails and crossrails
attached to the roof to secure cargo. The moveable tie
downs, attached to the side rails, should be used to
secure loadsto the luggage carrier.
Use GM accessory racks that are compatible with your
luggage carrier for transporting sports equipment.
These are available throughyour GM dealer.
2-59
You can adjust the crossrails to handle different sized
loads. Just loosen the slider knobs at each end of the
crossrail and move them to where you want them. Make
sure both sides of the crossrail are even. then tighten
the slider knobs.
Be sure the cargo
is properly loaded. Follow these guidelines:
Carrying small, heavy loads on the roof is not
recommended.
Tie the load to the moveable tie down (two per each
side of the side rails). Use the crossrails only to keep
the load from sliding.
Remove the center rubber strips in the crossrails and
attach the GM accessory rack to the nut plates provided
through the center slots (four per crossrail ).
The tap plates can be moved to accommodate various
positions by sliding them inside the crossrail to the
desired locations before mounting the acccssory rack.
2-60
If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails
as far apart as possible. Tie the load to the moveable
tie downs provided in the side rails. Also tie the load
to the bumpers. Do not tie the load so tightly that the
crossrails or side rails are damaged.
NOTICE:
Loading cargothat weighs more than 200 lbs.
(91 kg) on theluggage carrier may damage your
vehicle. When you carry largethings, never let
them hang over therear or thesides of your
vehicle. Load your cargoso that itrests on the
slats anddoes not scratch ordamage thevehicle.
Put the cargoagainst the side rails and fasten it
securely to the luggage carrier. Put the main
weight as far forward as
you can.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.
When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself.
NOTICE:
~~~
-~-
~
Don’t hold a cigarette lighterin with your hand
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from theheating element when it’s
ready. That canmake it overload,damaging the
lighter and theheating element.
The front ashtray must be completely pulled out to the
open position before the ashtray cover opens and
smoking material can be deposited.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier and
cargo are still securely fastened.
2-61
NOTICE:
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
(If Equipped)
Don’t put papers and other things that burn into
your ashtray. If you do, cigarettes or other
smoking materials could set them on fire
causing damage.
To remove the front ashtray, lift the release tab as high
as possible, then remove the tray.
Four-door vehicles have smaller ashtrays inside the rear
doors. Press PUSH to turn the ashtray around for use.
V
Sun Visors
To block out glare. you can swing down the top and
bottom visors. You can also swing the bottom visor from
side to side. Your visors may have an extension that can
be pulled out for additional glare protection and a strap
for holding small items,such as maps.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the sun visor down and lift the cover to expose the
vanity mirror.
2-62
Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn
on the lamps.
Accessory Power Outlets (If Equipped)
Sunroof (If Equipped)
If you have accessory power outlets,you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment. The accessory power
outlets are located below the cigarette lighter. Justpull
down from the top of the doorand follow the proper
installation instructions that are included with
any
electrical equipment you install.
These circuits are protectedby a fuse and have
maximum current levels.
I NOTICE:
When using the accessory power outlets, maximum
electrical load must not exceed25 amps. Always
turn off any electrical equipment when not in use.
Leaving electrical equipment on for extended
periods will drain your battery.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. Press and release the rear side of the button in
the miniconsole to open the sunroof. You can press the
forward side of the button to close the sunroof.Once the
sunroof is closed, press the forward side of the button to
open the sunroof to the vent position.
The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which you
can pull forward to block sun rays.
2-63
Universal Transmitter (If Equipped)
L
!Mini Console
Full-Size Console
This transmitter allows you to consolidate the functions
of up to three individual hand-held transmitters.It will
operate garrage doors and gates. or with the accessory
package, other devices controlled by radio frequency such
as home/office lighting systems and security systems.
The transmitter will learn and transmit the frequencies
of most current transmitters and is powered by your
vehicle's battery and charging system.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.
Programming the Transmitter
Do not use the transmitter with any garage dooropener
that does not have the “stop and reverse’’ feature. This
includes any garage door openermodel manufactured
before April 1, 1982.
Be sure that people crnd objects are clear of the garage
door j ~ u are
r
progrmnming!
Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while
programming the transmitter. Follow these stepsto
program up to three channels:
1. If you have not previously programmed a universal
channel. proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold down the
t w o outside buttons o n the universal transmitter until
the red light begins IO !lash rapidly (approximately
20 seconds). Then release the buttons. This procedure
initialiLes thc memory and erases any previous
settings tor a l l three channels.
2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter against the
bottom surface of the universal transmitter so that
you can still see the red light.
3. Decide which one of the three channels you want to
program. Using both hands, press the hand-held
transmitter button and the desired button on the
universal transmitter. Continue to hold both buttons
through Step 4.
4. Hold down both buttons until you see the red light
on the universal transmitter flash rapidly. The rapid
flashing, which could take upto 90 seconds,
indicates that the universal transmitter has been
programmed. Release both buttons once the light
starts toflash rapidly.
you have trouble programming theuniversal
transmitter, make sure that you have followed the
directions exactly as described and that the battery in the
hand-held transmitter is not dead. If you still cannot
program it, rotate the hand-held transmitter end over end
and try again. The universal transmittermay not work
do not meet current
with older garage door openers that
Federal Consumer Safety Standards. If you cannot
program the transmitter after repeatedattempLs, consult
your GM dealer.
11
Be sure tokeep the originalhand-held transmitter in case
you needto erase and reprogram the universal transmitter.
2-65
Operating the Transmitter
Press and hold the appropriate button on the universal
transmitter. The red light comes on while the signal is
being transmitted.
Note that the effective transmission range of the
universal transmitter may differ from the hand-held
transmitter and from one channel to another.
Erasing Channels
To erase all three programmed channels. hold down
the two outside buttons until the red light begins to
flash. Individual channels cannot be erased, but can be
reprogrammed using the procedure for programming the
transmitter explained earlier.
Training a Garage Opener with a “Rolling
Code” Feature
If you programmed the universal transmitter, but the
garage door will not open. and if your garage door opener
was manufactured after 1995, your garage door may have
a security feature that changes the ”code” of your garage
door opener every time it is opened or closed.
To determine if your garage door opener has this
“rolling code” feature, press the appropriate button on
the universal transmitter that was programmed. If the
red light flashes rapidly for one to two seconds. then
turns solid, your ,oarage door opener has this feature.
2-66
To program a garage door opener with the rolling code
feature, do the following:
1. Program your hand-held transmitter to the universal
transmitter by following the steps provided under
“Programming the Transmitter“ earlierin this section.
2. Remove the cover panel from the garage dooropener
receiver. It is located near the garage door opener motor.
3. Locate the training button on the garage door opener
receiver. The exact location and color will vary
among brands.
3. Press the training button on the garage door opener
receiver for one to two seconds.
5. Return to your vehicle and press the programmed
button on the universal transmitter until the red light
flashes rapidly (about two seconds).
6. Release the button. then repress it to confirm it was
programmed to the garage door opener receiver.
You may now use either the universal transmitter or
the hand-held transmitter to open your garage door.
If you still have difficulty in programming and require
assistance, please call 1-800-355-35 15.
Accessories
Accessories for the universal transmitter are available
from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like
additional information. please call 1-800-355-35 15.
Instrument Panel
I
I
2-67
A. Air Vents
H. Storage Compartment
B. Instrument Cluster
I. Audio System
C. Electronic Transfer Case (If Equipped)
J. Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
D. Comfort Controls
K. Lamp Controls
E. Glove Box
L. Rear Endgate Release
F. Ashtray
M. Brake Release
G. Cigarette LightedPower Auxiliary Outlets
(If Equipped)
N. Rear Window Washermiper
2-68
0. Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You'll know how fast you're
going, about how much fuel you've used, and many other things you'll need to know to drive safely and economically.
1
SERVICE
ENGINE
GATE
0
AJAR SHIFT
UNLEAMD FUEL ONLY
MPH
P R N @ D 2 1
I 0 0 0 0 0 0
Standard Cluster
2-69
CHECK
GAGES
OIL
0
53%
OptionaI'CIuster
2-70
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer showshow far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
Each tachometer has a different limit dependingon the
powertrain in your vehicle. The tachometer hasthree
areas: normal operating range, red warning range and
red danger range.
Your odometer is tamper resistant. It will show silver lines
between the numbers if someone tries to turn it back.
The normal operating range showsyour engine speed
during normal driving conditions.For example, when
the needle points to 2, it means the engineis running at
2,000 revolutions per minute (rpm). The tachometer
needle will vary all the time that the engine is running.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if
it can’t, then it’s set at zero, and a label must be put on
the driver’s doorto show the old mileage reading when
the new odometer was installed.
The shaded red warning range teIlsyou that your engine
speed is reaching its upper limits. Don’t drive very long
with the tachometer in the red warning range. If you
have a manual transmission, shiftto a higher gear as
soon as possible. If you have an automatic transmission,
lift your foot off of the accelerator pedal.
Trip Odometer
The solid red danger range tellsyou that your engine speed
is at its upper limits. Your should immediately shift to a
higher gear, or lift your foot off of the accelerator pedal.
The trip odometercan tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometerto zero.
To set the trip odometerto zero, press the button near
the readout .
Tachometer (If Equipped)
The tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
I NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in
the red range, or engine damage will occur.
2-71
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement.Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle's functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages. some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they're workinz. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle's functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there's a problem with your vehicle.
2-72
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, orwhen one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They're a big help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START. a tone will
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver's safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 20 seconds.
then it will flash for about
55 seconds. If the driver's
belt is already buckled,
neither the tone nor the
light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the
air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system
check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag module,
the wiring and the diagnostic module. For more
information on the air bag system, see ‘*AirBag” in
the Index.
AIR
BAG
This light will come on
when you start your engine,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t corne on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Charging System IndicatorLight
~
~
II..
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have
a problem with the charging system. It could indicate
that you have problems with a generator drivebelt, or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
2-73
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on (in the RUN position).
this gage shows your
battery’s state of charge in
DC volts.
(J
VOLTS
When the engine is running. the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
2-74
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased. this
condition should correctitself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
YOLIcan only drive fora short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive. turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
1
BRAKE
This light should come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it
doesn‘t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
(a(
)0)
20;1:,
if
I A CAUTION:
I
~
1
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towedfor service.
When the ignition is on. the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’trelease
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. if the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See ”Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
2-75
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
ANTI - LOCK
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay
on for several seconds.
That's normal.
If the light stays on. or comes on when you're driving,
your irehick needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light isn't on. you still have brakes. but you
don't have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on. you don't have anti-lock brakes
and there's ;I problern with your regular brakes. See
"B1-akc. Svstcm LVmling Light" earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brakc. s>.4temwarning light should come
on briet'ly n.hct1 ~ . o tu u r n the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn't co1nc3011 111cn. have it fixed so it will be
ready t o w;m U)LI it' thew is a problem.
2-76
Engine Coolant TemperatureGage
260
This gage shows the engine
coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into
the red area, your engine
is too hot!
lt means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you
have been operating your vehicle under normal driving
conditions. you should pull off the road. stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
In "Problems on the Road." this manual show you what
to do. See "Engine Overheating" in the Index.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine SoonLight)
NOTICE:
1
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition andemission
control systems.
This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle. helping to produce a cleaner
environment. ( I n Canada. OBD 11 is replaced by
Enhanced Diqnohtics. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON
light co111eson t o indicate that there is a problem and
service is rquired. X,l;df'unctions often will be indicated
by the system bciore a n y problem is apparent. This may
prevent mort' serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also t1csignt.d t o assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not beas
good and yourengine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn't comeon, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
0
0
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissionsand
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service is required.
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
2-77
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
0 Reducing vehicle speed.
0
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer. reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops trashing and remains on steady. see "If
the Light Is On Steady" following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe t o do so.
stop the lyehiclc. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady. see "If the Light
Is On Steady" following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps. and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle'?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap. making sure to f u l l y install
the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
2-78
cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water'?
I f so. your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
I f so. be sure t o fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
"Fuel" i n the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed.You may
notice this as stalling after start-up. stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration
or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go
away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detected
by the system and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one ormore of these conditions.
change the fuel brand y o u use. It w i l l require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
tr
none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your ciealer or qualified service centercheck the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Engine Oil Pressure Gage
The oil pressure gage shows
the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch)
when the engine is running.
011
0-
Canadian vehicles indicate pressurein kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A CAUTION:
Don't keep drivingif the oil pressure is low. If
so hot that it
you do, your engine can become
catches fire.You or others couldbe burned.
Check youroil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected
oil
problems can be costly and is not covered
by
your warranty.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or other ~roblemscausing low
oil pressure.
2-79
-w
Shift Light
/ f l s
You have the shift light
if you have a manual
transmission. This light
comes on very briefly as a
bulb check whenyou start
the engine. Shiftingwhen
the indicator lightis on will
help you get the best fuel
economy. See "Shift Light"
in the Index.
'd
8.
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light
This light is on the
instrument panel. It goes on
whenever the DRL are on,
the ignition is on,.the
headlamp switch is off
and the parking brake is
released.
2-80
1
Check Gages Light
The CHECK GAGES light
will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine. :
,.*
. ,,..
..3
CHECK
GAGES
i
I
1
I . .
-_.
.
If the light comes on and stayson while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure
gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
'
1;
..
. I .
,
.;i
., -.
"j
....
Gate Ajar Light
GATE
AJAR
Fuel Gage
This light will come on
briefly when you are
starting the engine. If it
stays on. your liftgate is
ajar. Try closing the liftgate
again. Never drive with the
liftgate even partially open.
When the ignition is on,
the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have remaining.
Here are four thingsthat some owners ask about. None
of these show aproblem with your fuel gage:
At the gas stsiion, the g a rump shuts off before the
gage reads FULL (Fj.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage
indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated
the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more
or less than half the tank’s capacity tofill the tank.
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
The gage doesn’t go back to EMPTY (E) when you
turn off the ignition.
2-81
.@% NOTES
2-82
Section 3 Comfort Controls and AudioSystems
In this section, you'll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be
sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-5
3 -6
3-6
3-6
3-6
Comfort Controls
Climate Control System
Air Conditioning
Heating
Ventilation System
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger (Option)
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock
Setting the Clock for AM-FM Stereo
with Compact Disc Player and Automatic
Tone Control
AM-FM Stereo
3-8
3- 10
3- 13
3-17
3- 19
3- 19
3-20
3-2 1
3-2 1
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Equalizer (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Fixed Mast Antenna
Comfort Controls
Temperature Knob
With this system. you can control the heating. cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle.
The upper knob regulates the temperature of the air
coming through the system. Turn the knob clockwise
for w r n w air, Turn the knob co~~nterclockwise
for
cooler air.
Climate Control System
Mode Knob
$8
hl
OF
1
The lower knob allows you to choose the direction of
a i r delivery.
OFF: This setting turns the system off. Some outside air
will still enter the vehicle whenever the vehicle is
moving fot-w;lrd.
XlAX A/C: This setting provides maximuM cooling
with the least amount of work. MAX A/C recirculates
much o f the air inside your vehicle s o it cools quickly.
N C : This settins cools the air entering your vehicle and
directs it 1111-oughthe instrument panel outlets.
+e
Fan Control
The switch with the fan symbol changes the fan speed.
To increase the fiu1 speed. move the switch upward
toward HI. To decrease the fan speed, move the switch
downward toward LO.
3-2
.)/J BI-LEVEL A/C: Air is delivered through the
heater 11oor outlets a s well as the instrument panel outlets.
+e
/J
VENT: This setting directs airflow through the
instrument panel outlets. The air conditioning
conlpressor is not working when VENT is selected.
0
+
HEATER: ’
This setting directs warmed air through
the heater floor outletsand windshield defroster outlets.
w.
‘H
BLEND: Airflow is divided equally between the
heater floor outletand the windshield defroster outlets.
DEFROST This setting directsmost air through
the windshield defroster outletsand some through the
heater outlets.
Air Conditioning
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reducesthe time it takes for your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed
for the air conditionerto work its best.
For quick cool-down on very hot days, use MAX A/C
with the temperature knob turned counterclockwise.
This setting should be used to keep odors and/or dust
from entering the vehicle. For normal cooling on
hot days, use A/C with the temperature knob
turned counterclockwise.
On cool but sunny days, use BI-LEVEL A/C to deliver
warm air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument
panel outlets.
When the air conditioner is on, you may sometimes
notice slight changes in your vehicle‘s engine speed and
power. This is normal because the system is designed
to cycle the compressor on and off to keep the
desired temperature.
Heating
The heater works best if you keep your windows closed
while using it. On cold days, use HEATER with the
temperature knob turned clockwise. BLEND is useful in
cool weather when you have fog or ice on the
windshield or side windows.
If you use the optional engine coolant heater before
starting your engine, yourheating system will produce
warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartment in
cold weather. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index.
3-3
Ventilation System
ror mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed. use VENT to direct outside air
through your vehicle. Airtlow is through the instrument
panel outlets.
Your vehicle's ventilation system supplies outside air- to
the inside of yo11r vehicle when it is moving. When the
vehicle is not moving. you can get outside a i r to flow
through by selecting any mode and any fan speed.
You can move the outlets t o direct the flow o f air, or
close the outlets altogether. When you close an outlet. it
will increase the flow o f air coming out of m y outIets
that are open.
Ventilation Tips
0
0
0
You will find air outlets i n the center and on the sides o f
your instrument panel.
Defogging and Defrosting
On cool, humid days. use BLEND to keep the
windshield and side windows clear.
Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the
windshield quickly in extreme humid or cold conditions.
Turn the temperature knob clockwise and move the fan
control toward HI.
Rear Window Defogger (Option)
window of as much snow or ice as possible before using
the rear window defogger.
To turn on the rear window defogger. find the switch
marked REAR DEFOG on your instrument panel below
the headlamp switch. Press ON until the light in the
switch comes on,then release it. it will only work if the
ignition switch is turned to RUN.
The rear window defogger will stay on for five to seven
minutes, then turn off. If you need additional warming
time, turn it on again. You can turn the defogger off at
any time by pressing OFF.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license. tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.
1 NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp
on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
I f your vehicle has this option, the rear window will
have lines that warm the glass. For best results. clear the
3-5
Audio Systems
AM-FM Stereo
Your Delco" audio system has been designed t o operate
easily and give years of listening pleasure. You w i l l yet
the most etl-joyment out of it if ~ O Lacq~laint
I
yo~~t-self
with it first. Find out what yo11rDelco system can do
and how to operate a l l its controls. to be sure you're
2
Oettins the most outof the advanced engineering that
went into it.
Setting the Clock for ANI-FM Stereo
with Compact Disc Player and Automatic
Tone Control
t
Playing the Radio
"
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM
and FM. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press this button to go to the next higher station
and stop.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to each station for a
few seconds. The radio will go to the next station, stop
for a few seconds, then go to the next station. SCAN
will appear on the display. Press SCAN again to
stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you t-cturn to your favorite stations. You can set LIPto
lit stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:
In addition to the four stations already set. up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time,
within five seconds. Whenever you press the same
two buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREBLE: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy. you may
want to decrease the treble.
4. Press S E T . ( S E T \vi11 appear on the display.j
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
3-7
AM-FNI Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM
and FM. The display sl~owsyour selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune i n radio stations.
SEEK: Press this button t o go to the next higher station
and stay there.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to each station for a
few seconds. The radio will go to the next station. stop
f o r a few seconds. then go to the next station. SCAN
w i l l appear on the display. Press SCAN again to
stop scanning.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: This knob turns the system on and off and
controls the volume. To increase volume, turn the knob
clockwise. Turn i t counterclockwise to decrease volunw.
I . Turn the radio on.
RCL: Display the time with the ignition o f f by pressing
this knob. When the radio is playing. press this knob t o
recall the station frequency.
3. Tune i n the desired station.
1. Press SET, (SET will appear on the display.)
5 . PI-cssone o f the f’our pushbuttons. within five
seconds. Whenever yo11press that numbered button.
the station \:ou set will return.
6. Repeat the steps f’or each pushbutton.
3-8
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2 . Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time.
within five seconds. Whenever you press the same
two buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREBLE: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. I f a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the frontor rear speakers.The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
Once the tape is playing, use the PWR-VOL, BAL and
FADE knobs just as you do for the radio. A lighted
arrow will be displayed toshow tape play direction.
FORWARD: Press the arrow button in the direction that
the lighted arrow points to advance quickly to another
part of the tape. Press STOP-EJECT lightly to stop
forwarding and play the tape.
REVERSE: Press the arrow button i n the opposite
direction that the lighted arrow points to reverse quickly
to another part of the tape. Press STOP-EJECT lightly
to stop reversing and play the tape.
PROG: Press this knob to go from one side of the tape
to the other.
STOP-EJECT Press this button to remove the tape or
stop playing the tape in order to play the radio. If you
leave a cassette tape in the player while listening to the
radio, it may become warm.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player'*:'#
and Equalizer(If Equipped)
AM-ST Press this button to tune an AM station that
broadcasts in stereo. Your STEREO light will come on
when you're receiving AM stereo. If you press AM-ST
and there is no more noise, it means the station is weak.
You'll hear the station better if you do not use AM-ST.
Press the button again to turn off stereo.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM
and FM. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press this button to go to the next higher station
and stay there.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: This knob turns the system on and off and
controls the volume. To increase volume, turn the knob
clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to each station for a
few seconds. The radio will go to the next station, stop
for a few seconds, then go to the next station. SCAN
will appear on the display. Press SCAN again to
stop scanning.
RCL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing
this knob. When the radio is playing, pressthis knob to
recall station frequency.
'
3-10
,
I
-.,
: i
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:
1 . TLII-II
the radio on.
'
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press one of the four pushbuttons. within five
seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
In addition to the four stations already set. up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
I. Tune in the desired station.
Setting the Tone
TONE ADJUSTMENT: Set the bass, midrange and
treble by using the levers in the upper middle left corner
to get the sound you want. The 60 and 250 levers adjust
the bass, 1 K is midrange, and the levers 3.5K and 10K
control the treble.
We suggest you start with 1 K i n the midpoint position.
Then move the other levers up until you get the amount
of bass and treble you like.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time.
within five seconds. Whenever you press the same
two buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
3-11
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
Once the tape is playing, use the PWR-VOL. BAL and
FADE knobs just as you do for the radio. A lighted
arrow will be'displayed to show tape play direction.
REVERSE: Press the arrow button i n the opposite
direction that the lighted arrow points t o reverse quickly
to another part of the tape. Press STOP-EJECT lightly
to stop reversing and play the tape.
FORWARD: Press the arrow button i n the direction that
the lilhted arrow points t o advance quickly to another
part o f the tape. Press STOP-EJECT lightly to stop
forwarding and play the tape.
SEARCH: Press this button to the recessed position.
Press the lighted mow to skip to the next selection. Press
the opposite direction an-ow that is n o t lighted to replay
the current selection or skip to the previous selection.
3-12
CrO2:This button lets you set the system for the type of
cassette being used. If you are using chrome or metal
tapes. press the button in.
PROG: Press this knob to go from one side o f the tape
to the other.
STOP-EJECT Press this button to remove the tape or
stop playing the tape i n order to play the radio. If you
leave a cassette tape i n the player while listening t o the
radio. it may become warm.
Your Delco system may be able to receive C-QljAM"
stereo broadcasts. Many AM stations around the country
use C-QUAM to produce stereo although some do
not. C-QUAM is a registered trademark of ,Motorola,
Inc. If vour Delco system can get C-QUAM signals,
your STEREO light will come on when you are
receiving stereo.
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary.
to overcome noise at any particuiar speed. The volume
level shouId always sound the same to you as you drive.
I f you don't want to use SCV. turn the control all the
way down. Each detent on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at a faster rate of speed.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM 1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is
capable of rotating continuously.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.
SCV Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCVj. With SCV, your
audio system adjusts autornatically to make up for- road
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you're not using it.
SEEK: Press the right m o w to tune to the next higher
station and the left amow to tune to the next lower station
and stay there. The sound w i l l mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds m t i l
SCAN appears o n the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and monxntarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
3-13
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM. six FM 1 and six FM2). Just:
1 . Turn the radio on.
?
-.
Press AM-FM t o select the band.
3. Tune i n the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting
yo^^
prefer.
5 . Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons. The
sound will mute. When it returns. release the button
Whenever you press that numbered button. the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-14
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM. FM 1 or FM2 mode and then press
P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your
pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press
P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen to ;1 specific stored station. P.SCAN
w i l l light up on the display while in this mode. I f one of
the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the
location you are i n , the radio will skip the preset station
and the radio display will show the channel number
(P1 through P6) for several seconds before advancing to
the next preset station.
Setting the Tone
Adjusting the Speakers
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it froln its
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
bass and counterclockwise t o decrease bass. When the
BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE setting will
change to MAN.
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers.
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front and counterclockwise for the rear
speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When
the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE setting
will change to MAN. If a station is weak or noisy. you
may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the
five preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to
the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS. ROCK. POP or JAZZ.
The display will show which mode the receiver is in. To
return to the manual mode, press and release this button
until MAN appears on the display. This will return the
tone adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. If a
BASS or TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE
setting will change to MAN.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Compact Disc
PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on.
(Please note that you can also turn the system on when
you insert a compact disc into the player with the
ignition on.)
Insert a disc partway into the slot. label side LIP.The
player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and the disc
should play. CD and a CD symbol will also appear on
the display. Anytime you are playing a CD. the letters
CD will be next to the CD symbol.
REV (43: Press and ho16 REV to return rapidly t o a
favorite passage. YCXIwill hear the disc selection pIay at
high speed while you press the REV button. This allows
y o u to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release REV to resum playing.
FWD (6): Press and hold this butron to advance rapidly
within a track. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while YCNI press the FWD button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release FWD to resume playing.
AM-FM: While i n the CD mode. press this burton to
stop playing the CD and play the radio, The CD symbol
w i l l still display but the word CD will be replaced with
either A M . FM I or FM2. (If the radio is turned off, the
disc stays i n the player and w i l l res~~rne
playing at the
point where it stopped.)
KECALI,: Press this button to see what track is playing.
Press it again within five seconds t o se.e how long the
CD has been playing that track. Elapsed titne is
displayed in minutes and tenths o f a second. The track
number will also appear when ;Inew track begins to
play. Press RECALL again to return to the time display.
3-16
CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio
when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button. To
return to the player, press CD AUX. When a disc is
playing, the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear
on the display. ( I f the radio is turned off, the disc stays
Theft-Deterrent Feature
in the player and will resume playing at the point where
it stopped.)
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
EJECT: Press this button to eject the disc from the
player and play the radio.
When the same ora new disc is inserted, the disc wilI
start playing on track one. If a compact disc is left
sitting in the opening for more than a few seconds, the
player will pull the CD back in. The radio will continue
playing. When the ignition is off, press this button to
load a CD. If you leave a compact disc in the player
while listening to the radio. it may become warm.
THEFTLOCK” is designed to discourage theftof your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytimebattery
power is removed. If your battery loses power forany
reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code
before it will operate.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how to enter your
secret code to activatethe THEFTLOCK system. It is
recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse
between any steps, the radio automatically revertsto
time and you must start the procedure over at Step4.
3-17
I . Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it i n a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
2. Turn the isnition to ACCESSORY or R U N .
Enter your secret code as follows: pause n o more than
I5 seconds between steps:
3. Turn the radio off.
1. LOC appears when the ignition is o n .
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold thcm dow~l
until --- shows on the display. Next yo11 will use the
secret code number which you have written down.
2. Press M N and 000 cvill appear on the display.
5 . Press M N and 000 will appear o n the display.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
w i t h your code.
6. Press M N again to make the last two digits agree
w i t h your code.
7. Press HR t o 111akethe first one or two digits agree
with your code.
8. Press AM-FM after- you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you ha\;e written down.
The display will show REP to Ict you know that you
need t o repeat Steps 5 through 7 t o confirm your
secret code.
3. Press M N again to lnake the last two digits agree
with your code.
5 . Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code ~ O L I have written down
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
If ~ O L I enter the wrong code eight times, INOP w i l l
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition o n before yo11 can try a p i n . When you
try asain. you w i l l only have three chances to enter the
correct code before lNOP appears.
I f you lose or forger your code. contact your dealer.
3-18
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code asfollows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in
this section.
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
Understanding Radio Reception
2. Turn the radio off.
FM Stereo
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5 . Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show ---,indicating that the radio is
no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and laterapplied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adaptto higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seemsnormal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
3-19
To help avoid hearingloss or damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
1 NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sure you can add
what you want. If you can, it’s very important to do
it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere
with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, Delco
radio or othersystems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly
So, hefore adding sound equipment, check
with
your dealer and t w sure tocheck Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
--
3-20
--
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes shouldbe stored in their
cases away from contaminants, directsunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. If you notice a reduction in sound
quality, try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape
or the tape player at fault. If this other cassette has no
improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassettewith pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. I t
is normal for the cassetteto eject while cleaning. Insert
the cassette at least three times to ensurethorough
cleaning. A scrubbing action cleaningcassette is
available through your GM dealership.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action,
wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject and, it may not clean as thoroughly as the
scrubbing type cleaner.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases andaway from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Fixed Mast Antenna
slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender.
3-21
3-22
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4- 2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4-9
4-1 1
4- 12
4-13
4- 14
4-28
4-29
4-32
4-33
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving Guidelines
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
4-34
4-35
4-35
4-37
4-4 1
4-42
4-42
4-45
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
(Four-wheel Drive with the
Manual Shift TransferCase Only)
Recreational Vehicle Towing (Except
Four-wheel Drive with the Manual Shift
Transfer Case)
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
4- 1
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone cangive about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle LIP. (See"Safety Belts" in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means "be ready for anything."
On city streets, rural roads or freeways. it nleans
"always expect the unexpected."
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable o f
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
follonring distance. It's the best defensive driving
mmeuver. i n both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or t u r n suddenly.
4-2
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributorto the
highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcoholand then drive. But
what if people do? How much is “too much” if the
driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general informationon the problem.
Alcohol affects four thingsthat anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC)of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Drunken Driving
0
Judgment
0
Muscular Coordination
0
The drinker’s body weight
0
Vision
0
0
Attentiveness.
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
0
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol.In most cases,
these deaths arethe result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, some 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol,so they
never drive after drinking. For personsunder 2 1, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychologicaland
developmental reasons for these laws.
The amount of alcohol consumed
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce ( 120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1- 1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
Since alcohol is carried in body water. this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states. and
throughout Canada. the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries. it's even lower. The BAC limit for all
comnlercial drivers i n the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course. as we've seen. it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks. and how
quickly the person drinks them.
It's the amount of alcohol that counts. For example. if
the same person drank three double martinis ( 3 ounces
or 90 In1 of liquor each) within an hour. the person's
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinkingw i l l have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference. too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0. I O percent. the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater: at a
level of 0.15 percent. the chance is 35 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street’?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoidthe collision.
There’s something else about drinkingand driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger-- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
I A CAUTION:
I
Drinking and then drivingis very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected b y even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious or even
fatal collision if you drive afterdrinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride
with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride homein a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
--
--
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the
brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involvesperception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decideto push on thebrake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have tobring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 314 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,so
keeping enough space between your vehicleand others
is important.
And, of course, actualstopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you‘re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
-
.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes(ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself.You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noisewhile this test
is going on. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with the
ANTI - LOCK
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
lister than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions.
Here's how anti-lock works. Let's say the road is wet.
You're driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out i n
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here's what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. I f one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling. the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at the
rear wheels.
4-8
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake. your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the timeyou need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you‘ you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even thoughyou have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the brakes
vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this is
normal. On vehicleswith four-wheel drive, your
anti-lock brakes work at all times -- whether you are in
two-wheel drive or four-wheeldrive.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, eachof us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. I f you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you‘ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
4-9
Suppose you‘re steering througha sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
What should YOLI do if this ever happens‘?Ease up on the
accelerator pedal. steer the vehicle the way you want it
to go. and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course. the posted speedsare
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
I f y o u need t o reduce your speed as you approach it
curve. do it befhre you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try t o adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
CLII-ut.klaintain ;I reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
acwlcrate llntil > . o u are out of the curve. and then
accclcrate gcntlv i n t o the straightaway.
3- 1 0
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere. or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you can’t: there isn’t room. That’s
the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. (See ”Braking in
Emergencies” earlier i n this section.) It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem. to the left or
right depending on the space available.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find sometime that your right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile
you're driving.
I OFF - ROA
An emergency like this requires close attentionand a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, you can
turn it a tull 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. Bur you hrt\*eto act fast, steer quickly,and
just a h quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the ob-jcct.
The fact t h a t wch clncrgcncy situations are always
possible i h ;I good reason t o practice defensive driving at
all times and NYN satety belts properly.
v/
edge of paved surface
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so
that your vehiclestraddles the edge of the pavement. You
can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the
right front tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
4-11
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment.
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead. then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation. an error i n
judgment. or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
"Drive ahead." Look down the road. to the sides and to
crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about
malung a successful pass. wait for a better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection. delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it's all right to pass
(providing the road ahead isclexj. Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line.
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
4-12
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you're awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision.
especially if you're following a larger vehicle.
Also, you won't have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops.Keep back a
reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don't
get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass. you will have a
"running start" that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass.
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn't trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When
you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its frontin your
inside mirror, activate your rightlane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex.The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or startingto turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say aboutwhat
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and accelerationj don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don‘t give up. Keep tryingto steer and
constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a drivercan lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle‘s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid,too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
4-13
If your vehicle starts to slide. ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. I f you start steering quickly enough. your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow. ice.
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety. you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction. try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including enginebraking by shifting to a lower
t
oear). A n y sudden changes could causethe tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water. ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface“-- and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-14
Driving Guidelines
This multipurpose passenger vehicle is defined asa utility
vehicle in Consumer Information Regulations issuedby
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) of the United States Department of
Transportation. Utility vehicles have higher ground
clearance and a nmower track to make them capable of
perfolming in a wide variety of off-road applications.
Specific design characteristics givethem a higher center of
gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage of the higher
2
oround clearance is a better view of the road allowing you
to anticipate problems.They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as conventional
two-wheel-drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
or vehicle rollover.
Off-Road Driving withYour
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are sutfre things to do before you go out. For
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have
four-wheel drive.
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance and
service work done. Check to make sure all underbody
shields (if so equipped) are properly attached. Be sure
you read all the information about your
four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enough
fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels
up where they should be? What are the local laws that
apply to off-roading where you’ll be driving? If you
don’t know, you should check with law enforcement
people in the area. Will you be on someone’s private
land? If so, be sure to get the necessary permission.
Also, see “Anti-Lock Brakes” in the Index.
If your vehicle doesn‘t have four-wheel drive,you
shouldn‘t drive off-road unless you‘reon a level,
solid surface.
Off-road driving can begreat fun. But it does have some
definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren‘t
marked. Curves aren’t banked. There areno road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery. rough, uphill or downhill. In
short. you’ve gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s
why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll
find many driving tips and suggestions. Thesewill help
make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier itemsas far
forward as you can.
Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around.
4- 15
A CAUTION:
0
0
0
Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a suddenstop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on theload floor canbe
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers canbe
struck by flying objects. Secure the
cargo properly.
Heavy loads on theroof raise the vehicle's
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
in.jured if the vehicle rollsover. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, noton the roof.
Keep cargoin the cargo areaas far forward
and low as possible.
You'll find other important information in this manual.
See "Vehicle Loading." "Luggage Carrier" and "Tires"
in the Index.
4-16
Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide whoIesome and satisfying
recreation. However. it also raises environmental
concerns. GM recognizes these concerns and urges
every off-roader to follow these basic rules for
protectins the environment:
Always use established trails, roads and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational drivihg; obey all posted regulations.
0
Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment -- shrubs. flowers. trees, grasses -- or
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground).
0
Always carry a litter bag . . . make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted).
camp stoves and lanterns.
0
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
cotnbustible materials that could catch fire f1-0~11the
heat of the vehicle's exhaust system.
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area.Know the terrain and plan your route.
You are much less likely to get bad surprises. Get
accurate maps of trails and terrain.Try to learn of any
blocked or closed roads.
It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happensto one of them, the other
can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so. be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be
handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know how to
use it properly.
Getting Familiar with Off-RoadDriving
It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safeand
close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here’s what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes. for example,need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for
unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands,
feet and body, you’ll need to respond to vibrations and
vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful
off-road driving. Oneof the best ways to control your
vehicle is to control your speed.Here are some things to
keep in mind. At higher speeds:
0
you approach things fasterand you have less time to
scan the terrain for obstacles.
e you have less time to react.
0
you have more vehicle bounce when you drive
over obstacles.
a you’ll need more distance for braking, especially
since you’re on an unpaved surface.
IA
CAUTION:
When you’re driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw you
out of position. This could cause you to lose
control and crash. So, whether you’re driving on
or off the road, youand your passengers should
wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over mLmy different kinds
of terrain. You need to be fatniliar with the terrain and its
many different features. Here are some things to consider.
Surface Cmditiom. Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel. rocks. grass. sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and brakinz of your vehicle i n different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surfxe you are on.
you may experience slipping. sliding. wheel spinning.
delayed acceieration, poor traction and longer
braking distances.
Sru-fnce 0hstcrcle.v. Unseen or hidden obstacles can be
hazardous. A rock. log hole. rut or bump CUI startle you if
you're not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are
hidden by grass, bushes. snow or even the rise and f a l l of
the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:
Is the path ahead clear'?
0
Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead'?
Does the travel take you uphill or downhill'? (There's
more discussion of these sub-jectslater.)
Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quicklv'?
4-18
When you drive over obstacles orrough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughsor other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if
you're not prepared.
When you drive over bumps. rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens. even
with one or two wheels, you can't control the vehicle as
well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface. it's
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration.
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs. posted speed limits or signal
lights. You have to use your own good judgment about
what is safe and what isn't.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainty true for off-road driving. At
the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes. perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even z1 small amount of alcohol. You could
have a serious -- or even fatal -- accident if you drink
and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
See "Drunken Driving" in the index.
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safelyon hills requires good judgment and
an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t do.
There are somehills that simply can’t be driven, no
matter how well built the vehicle.
IA
~
~
CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle. If
you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you can’t control your speed. If you
drive across them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, don’t drive the hill.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one
of those hills that’s just too steep to climb, descend or
cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small
hill, for example, there may be a smooth. constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where you
can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the
incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you may
not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by
bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
0
Is there a constant incline, ordoes the hill get sharply
steeper in places?
0
Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface causetire slipping?
0
Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
won’t have to make turning maneuvers?
0
Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path (boulders. trees, logs or ruts)?
0
What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment. a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way to
find out.
0
Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because they
are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
4-19
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
0
0
0
Use a low gear and get a firm grip or1 the
steering wheel.
Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Don't use more power than you need.
because you don't want your wheels to start spinning
or sliding.
Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
IA
CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep
hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving uphills,
always try to go straight up.
4-20
0
Ease LIPon your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
0
Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible
to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
0
Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to
let opposing traffic know you.1-e there.
0
Use your headlamps even during the day. They make
you more 1:isible to oncoming traffic.
A CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest)
of a hill at full speed can
cause a n accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, o r even another vehicle. You
could be seriously injured orkilled. As you near
the topof a hill, slow down and stay alert.
@
What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, and I can’t make it up the hill?
A:
If this happens, there are some things you should
do. and there are some thingsyou must not do.
First, here’s what you should do:
0
Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it
from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake.
0
If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
0
As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This
way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight
and maneuver as you back down. It’s best that you
back down the hill with your wheels straight rather
than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel
too far to the left or right will increase the possibility
of a rollover.
Here are some thingsyou must not do if you stall, or are
about to stall, when going up a hill.
0
If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to
restart it. With the brake pedal depressed and the
parking brake still applied, shiftthe transmission to
PARK (P) (or, shift toNEUTRAL (N) if your
vehicle has amanual transmission) and restart the
engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R), release the
parking brake, and slowlyback down the hill as
straight as possible in REVERSE (R).
Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) (or depressing the clutch, if you
have a manual transmission) to “rev-up” the engine
and regain forward momentum. This won’t work.
Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and
you could go out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
0
Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall
when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to
stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to causeyou to
roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up
the hill, you must back straight down the hill.
4-21
Suppose, after stalling,I try to back down the
hill and decide I just can’t doit. What should
I do?
A:
Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK ( P ) (or the manual transmission in
FIRST ( I ) ) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL ( N ) when you leave the vehicle.
Leave i t i n some gear-.
4-22
~
A CAUTION:
I
If you have a manual transfer case shift
lever,
shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL(Nj can
cause your vehicle to rolleven if the transmission
is in PARK (P) (or, if you have the manual
transmission, even if you’re in gear). Thisis
because the NEUTRAL(N) position on the
transfer case overrides the transmission.
If you
are going to leave your vehicle, set the parking
brake and shift the transmission to
PARK (P) (or,
put your manual transmission inFIRST (I)).
But do not shift thetransfer case to the
NEUTRAL (N) position. Leave the transfer case
in the 2HI,4HI or 4LO position.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to
consider a number of things:
0
How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
0
What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough‘?Slippery‘?
Hard-pac ked dirt ‘? Gravel?
0
Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts’?
Logs? Boulders’?
0
What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, anduse a low
gear. This way. engine drag can help your brakes and
they won‘t have t o do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping y ) u r \rehick under control at all times.
I1 A CAUTION:
I
Heavy braking when going aown a hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could
cause loss of control and a serious accident.
Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill
and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed
under control.
&=
A:
Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
Yes! These are important because if you ignore them
you could lose control and have a serious accident.
0
When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across.
You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down.
0
Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). or with the clutch pedal depressed
in a manual shift. This is called “free-wheeling.”
Your brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
4-23
Q:
A:
0
Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
from tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an
incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels.
This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover.
It’s much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here’s what to do.
Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
Shift to PARK (P) (or to NEUTRAL ( N ) with the
nlanual transmission) and,while still brakin,,0 restart
the engine.
Shift back to a low gear. release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
I f the engine won’t start, get out and get help.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide
whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are some
things to consider:
0 A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up or
down a hill. the length of the wheel base (the
distance from the front wheels t o the rear wheels)
reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end
over end. But when you drive across an incline, the
much more narrow track width (the distance between
the left and right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle
0
Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel. muddy spots, or even wet
2
orass can cause your tires to slip sideways. downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways. it can hit something
that will trip it (a rock. a rut, etc.) and roIl over.
0
Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with
the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into
a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully whether
t o try to drive across 31incline. Just because the trail goes
;lcross the incline doesn’t mean you have to drive it. The
last vehcle to try it might have rolled over.
A CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that’s too steep will
make your vehicle roll over.You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness of the incline, don’tdrive
across it. Find another route instead.
A
4-24
e:
A:
What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start to
slide downhill. What should I do?
If you feel your vehicle starting to slideside.ways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a
much better way to prevent this is toget out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface is
like before you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline, be
sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get
out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you’ll be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
A CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) sideof a vehicle
stopped acrossan incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high)side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
.
.
4-25
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud. snow or sand. your wheels
won't get good traction. You can't accelerate as quickly,
turning is more difficult. and you'll need longer
braking distances.
It's best to use a low gear when you're in mud -- the
deeper the mud. the lower the gear. In really deep mud.
the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don't
b
*et stuck.
When you drive on sand, you'll sense a change in wheel
traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the
sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand
dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has
an effect on steering. accelerating and braking. You may
want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly
when driving on sand. This will improve traction.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it's very easy to lose control. On wet
ice, for example. the traction is so poor that you will
have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving,
poor steering and difficult braking can came you t o slide
out of control.
4-26
I A CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs. currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your
vehicle could fall through theice and you and
your passengers could drown. Driveyour vehicle
on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems.
But heavy rain can mean tlash flooding, and flood
waters demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it's deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles or
exhaust pipe. don't try it -- you probably won't get
through. Also. water that deep can damage your axle
and other vehicle parts.
If the water isn’t too deep, then drivethrough it slowly.
At fast speeds, water splasheson your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occurif you
get your tailpipe under water. And, as long asyour
tailpipe is under water, you’llnever be able to start your
engine. When you go through water, remember that
when your brakes get wet, itmay take you longer
to stop.
b
I A CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweepyour vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers could drown. If it’s
only shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from underyour tires, and you could lose
traction and roll the vehicle over. Don’tdrive
through rushing water.
See “Driving Through Water” in the Index for more
information on driving throwh water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substancescan cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure.
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system
for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling
system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
Driving at Night
a Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
olare fromheadlamps behind you.
Since you can't see as well, you may need to sIow
down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
3
0
0
k- ---I
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
a In remote areas, watch for animals.
0
If you're tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night Vision
N o one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice a s much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs. with night vision
problems. or by htigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
0
Drive defensively.
Don't drinkand drive
4-28
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example. if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you're
driving, don't wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driverwho
doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield andall the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glareat night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contractrepeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving: that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Justas yourheadlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim,so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and aren‘t
even aware of it.
Driving in Rainand on Wet Roads
U
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good ason dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-29
The heavier the rain,the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic sipals.
pavement markings. the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It's wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.
4-30
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can't. try to slow down before you hit them.
I A CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won't
work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose controlof the vehicle.
After driving througha large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually rideon the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
I NOTICE:
If you drive tooquickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drivethrough water thatis slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deeppuddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections fromtrees. telephone
poles or othervehicles. and raindrops “dimple“ the
water’s surface. there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn‘t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
0
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
0
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
4-31
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You'll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic sipals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
a Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
a Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You'll save time and energy. (See the
next part. "Freeway Driving.")
a Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light
is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green. and just before you start to
move. check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
4-32
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clearview of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance overyour shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on thefreeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it‘s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways,parkways,
expressways, turnpikesor superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own specialrules.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
4-33
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip?If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it's ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you'll find experienced and able service expertsin GM
dealerships all across North America. They'll be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
0
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
0
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Lurrzps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure'?
Make sure you're ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you're not fresh -- such as after a day's
work -- don't plan t o make too many miles that first part
of the journcv. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive i n .
0
4-34
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
Weather For-ecvrsts: What's the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps'!
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually sucha condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Callit
highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a secund, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
L
0
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
0
Keep y o u r e y e s moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
Driving on steep hills ormountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
0
I f you Sct d w p y . pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking xe;L and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety. treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer andmore enjoyable. (See “Off-Road
Driving’’ in the Index for information about driving
off-road.)
4-35
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires. cooling system and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steepor long hill.
A CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could
get so
hot that they wouldn’t workwell. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Shift down tolet your
engine assist yourbrakes ona steep
downhill slope.
IA
CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have your engine running
and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift downto a
lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and
transmission. and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving o n two-lane
roads i n hills o r mountains. Don‘t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There couldbe
something in your lane. like a. stalled car or an accident.
You may see hishway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones. a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
4-36
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper,a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and
reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving
under severe conditions, include asmall bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet or a couple
of burlap bags to help
provide traction. Besure you properly securethese
items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those placeswhere your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
0
You may want to put winter emergency suppliesin
your vehicle.
4-37
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast. the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
‘‘1 :-................
..................
.
. . . ... .. .. . ., .. ._. ._ ._ .. ._. _ .. .. _. _. _ . _, ..I _ . . _ . . .
. . .. .
.. . . . . .
.
,
,
,
.
.
,
, ,
,
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping soonerthan you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
A
What’s the worst time for this’?“Wet ice.“ Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32°F; OOC) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
4-38
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve oran overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. I f
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanketaround you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insuIators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags , floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
0
Turn on your hazard flashers.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-39
A CAUTION:
Snow cantrap exhaust gases under your
vehicle.
This can cause deadlyCO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see ito r smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the baseof your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And
check
around again from time
to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window justa little on the sideof the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. Thiswill help
keep CO out.
4-40
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make i t 90 a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle. and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then. shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm. you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
(Four-wheel Drive With Manual
Shift TransferCase Only)
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Place an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in FIRST ( 1).
3. Firmly attach the vehicle being towed to the tow
vehicle. Do not tow the vehicle by the rear bumper
bar. Refer to the hitch manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Place the manual shift transfer case shift lever in
NEUTRAL (N).
IA
CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case into NEUTRAL (N) can
cause your vehicle to rolleven if the transmission
is in PARK (P), for anautomatic transmission, or
if your vehicleis in gear, for a manual
transmission. You or others could be injured.
Make sure the parking brakeis firmly set before
you shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL (N).
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attachedto the tow vehicle.
6. Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch and
turn it one notch forward of the LOCK position. This
places the key in the OFF position, which unlocks
the steering column while preventing battery drain.
Unlocking the steering column will allow for proper
movement of the front wheelshires duringtowing.
4-41
Recreational Vehicle Towing
(Except Four-wheel Drive With
Manual Shift Transfer Case)
Loading Your Vehicle
Vehicles with two-wheel drive or the optional electronic
shift transfer case require special modifications before
they can be towed in this manner. Please contact your
dealer for the towing information that is appropriate for
your particular vehicle.
Vehicles with all-wheel drive (AWD) can not be towed
in this manner.
The Certificationflire label is found on the driver’s door
edge, above the door latch. The label shows the size of
your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to
obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is
called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle. all occupants,
fuel, cargo and trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.
4-42
The Certificatioflire label alsotells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR).To find out the actual loads on
your front andrear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spreadout your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, or the
GAWR for eitherthe front or rearaxle.
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.
Similar appearing vehiclesmay have different GVWRs
and payloads. Please note yourvehicle’s
Certificationmire label or consult
your dealer for
additional details.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask
your dealer to help you load your vehicle the rightway.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not coverparts or
components thatfail because of overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else -- they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
I A CAUTION:
~
~
~
_
_
~~
_
~
_
Do not load your vehicie any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, partson your vehicle can break,
or it can change the way your vehicle handles. These
could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
..
.
.
4-43
A CAUTION:
~
~
~
~
1
~
~
~
Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and
injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in
a crash.
0 Put things in the cargo areaof your vehicle.
Try tospreadtheweight evenly.
0 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicleso that some of them are
above the topsof the seats.
0 Don't leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
0 Don't leave a seat folded down unlessyou
need to.
There's also important loading information lor off-road
driving in this manual. See "Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving" in the Index.
4-44
Payload
The payload capacity is shown on the Certificationflire
label. This is the maximum load capacity that your
vehicle can carry. Be sure to include the weight of the
occupants as part of your load. If you added any
accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the
factory, remember to subtract the weight of these things
from the payload. Your dealer can help you with this.
Add-on Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need to put a
limit o n how many people you carry inside your vehicle.
Be sure to weigh your vehicle before ~ O Lbuy
I
and install
the new equipment.
NOTICE:
Your warranty doesn't cover partsor
components that fail because of overloading.
L
I NOTICE:
Towing a Trailer
I A CAUTION:
I
~
I
i
If you don’t use the correct equipmentand drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the traileris too heavy, the
brakes may not work well or even at all. You
and your passengers could be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the
steps in this section. Ask your GM dealer for
advice and information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
--
~
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, andsee your GM dealer
for important information about
towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
Every vehicle is ready for $time trailer towing. If yours
was built with trailering options, as many are, it’s ready
for heavier trailers. But trailering is different than just
driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes
in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful.
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
4-45
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you have an automatic transmission, you can use
DRIVE (D) (or. as you need to, a lower gear) when
towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in
DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer will minimize heat
buildup and extend the lifeof your transmission. If
you have a manual transmission and you are towing
a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH ( 5 ) gear. Just
drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a
lower gear).
If you do, here aresome important points:
a There are many different laws, includingspeed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
a Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) or less. You should always
use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more
than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer
about sway controls.
a Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
a Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don‘t drive over50 mph (80 k m h ) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
0
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safelybe?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed. altitude, road grades. outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
The following chart shows how much your trailer can
weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.
4-46
Vehicle
2-Wheel Drive,
Auto. Trans.
2-Wheel Drive,
Manual Trans.
4-Wheel Drive &
All-Wheel Drive,
Auto. Trans.
4-Wheel Drive &
All-Wheel Drive,
Manual Trans.
Axle Ratio Trailer Wt.
3.OS
4,500 lbs. (2 04 1 kg)
5,500 lbs. (2 495 kg)
3.42
3.424,500
lbs. (2 04 1 kg)
3.08
3.42
3.73
3.42
4,000 lbs. (1 8 14 kg)
5,000 lbs. (2 268 kg)
5,000’1bs.(2 268 kg)
4,000 lbs. (1 8 14kg)
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it
has all the required trailering equipment.The weight of
additional optional equipment, passengers and cargoin
the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum
trailer weight.
You can ask your dealerfor our trailering informationor
advice, oryou can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L 1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you
must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
4-47
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle‘s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires.You’ll find these numbers on the
CertificationRire label on the driver’s door edge, above
the door latch, or see‘.Tire Loading” in the Index. Then
be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
A
B
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
If you‘ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg), be sure to use a
properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and
sway control of the proper size. Thisequipment is
very important for propervehicle loading and good
handling when you’re driving.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren‘t, you may be able t o get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
4-48
-
0
Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
Trailer Brakes
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the
Index). Dirt andwater can, too.
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be
adequate. Be sure toread and follow the instructionsfor
the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains betweenyour vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road
if it becomes separated fromthe hitch. instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 Ibs. (450 kg)
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only i f
The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far,then make the brake
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends
fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for
this. if you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use
steel brake tubing.
Driving witha Trailer
If you have a rear-most window open and
you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide
(CO)could come into yourvehicle. You can’t see
or smellCO. It can cause unconsciousness or
death. (See “Engine Exhaust”in the Index.) To
maximize your safety when towinga trailer:
Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
0 Keep the rear-most windows closed.
If exhaust does come into yourvehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
MAX A/C because it only recirculatesthe
air inside your vehicle. (See b‘ Comfort
Controls” in the Index.)
4-50
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road. you‘ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments). safety chains. electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. I f the trailer has
electric brakes. start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip. check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure. and that the lamps and a n y trailer brakes
are still working.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twiceas far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
I NOTICE:
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you‘re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
I’urn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher (includedin
the optional trailering package).
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you‘re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
4-51
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you
are seeing your signal when they are not. It's important
to check occasionally to be surethe trailer bulbs are
still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear byfilw you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don't shift
down. you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade. shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
if you have an automatic transmission. you should use
DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer. Operating your
vehicle in DRIVE ( D ) when towing a trailer will
minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your
transmission. Or. if you have a manual transmission. it's
better not to use FIFTH ( 5j gear. just drive i n
FOURTH (4) gear (or. as you need to. a lower gear).
4-52
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades.
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a
lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn
your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this. let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
w i t h the automatic transmission in PARK (P) (or the
rnanual transmission out of gear and the parking brake
applied) for afew minutes before turning the engine off.
If you do get the overheat warning, see "Engine
Overheating" in the Index.
Parking on Hills
You really should not park your vehicle. with a trailer
attached. on ;Ihill. I f something goes wrong, your ris
could start to move. People can be injured, and both
your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
7
.?
A CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shiftlever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
i
I
parking brakefirmly set. Your vehiclecan roll.
If you have leftthe engine running, thevehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re onfairly level ground, use the steps
that follow.
If you have four-wheel drive with a manual
transfer case shift lever and your transfer case
is
in NEUTRAL (N),your vehicle will be free to
roll, evenif your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfercase isin a drive gear not in
NEUTRAL (N).
--
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1 . Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
whiie you:
Start your engine:
Shift into a gear: and
Release the parking brake.
3,. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
4-54
Maintenance When TrailerTowing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt. cooling system
and brake adjustment. Each of these is covered in this
manual. and the Index will help you find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it‘s a good idea to review these
sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
The light duty trailerwiring is a six-wire harness
assembly. The optional heavy-duty trailer wiring is an
eight-wire harness assembly. The harnesses are stored
under the vehicle, along the passenger-side frame
crossmember on two-door vehicles or on the driver’s
side corner framecrossmember on four-door vehicles.
The heavy-duty trailer wiring has a 30-amp feed wire
with an inline fuse located by the junction block. See
“Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index. Both
harnesses have no connector and should be wired by a
qualified electrical technician.The technician can use
the following color code chart when connecting the
wiring harness to your trailer.
Dark Blue: Use for electric trailer brakes or
auxiliary wiring.
0
0
Light Green: Back-up lamps (eight-wire
harness only).
Brown: Taillamps and parking lamps.
0
Yellow: Left stoplamp and turn signal.
0
Dark Green: Right stoplamp and turn signal.
0
White (Heavy Gage): Ground wire.
0
White (Light Gage): Auxiliary stoplamp.
Securely attach the harness to the trailer, then tape or
strap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you leave it
loose enough so the wiring doesn‘t bend or break, but
not so loose that it drags on the ground. Storethe
harness in its original place. Wrap the harness together
and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged.
Red: Use for battery charging; it connects to the
starter solenoid (eight-wire harnessonly).
4-55
.bNOTES
4-56
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you'll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5 -2
5-2
5-3
5 -7
5-12
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
5-22
5 -22
5-23
5-35
5-36
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
Compact Spare Tire (If Equipped)
If You're Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
Press the button on top of
the steering column all the
way down to make your
front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, press the button until the first
click and release.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
5-2
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other WarningDevices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cablesto start your
vehicle. But please use the following steps to do
it safely.
I A CAUTION:
I
~
1
~
NOTICE:
I
~
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered
by
your warranty.
Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it. This could damage your vehicle, even if
you have a manual transmission. And if you have
an automatic transmission, it
won’t start thatway.
~
~
~
Batteries can hurtyou. They can be dangerous
because:
0 They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explodeor ignite.
0 They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some
or all
of these things can hurtyou.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
I NOTICE:
If the other systemisn’t a 12-volt system witha
negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged.
5-3
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cabIes
can reach. but be sure the vehicles aren't touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don't want. You wouldn't be able to
start your vehicle. and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
You could be injured if the vehicles roll. Set the
parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an
automatic transmission in PARK (Pj or a manual
transmission i n NEUTRAL (N).If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle with a manual transfer case
shift lever. be sure the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL (N).
IA
CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up
even when the engine
is not running and can injure
you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric Fan.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter. or accessory power outlets, if you have this
option. Turn off all lamps that aren't needed as well
as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both
batteries. In addition, it could save your radio!
I NOTICE:
If you leave your radioon, it could be badly
damaged. The repair wouldn'tbe covered by
your warranty.
IA
CAUTION:
If your vehicle has airconditioning, the auxiliary
electric fan under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running and can injure
you. Keep hands, clothing andtools away from
any underhood electricfan.
4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries. Find
the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
each battery.
IA
CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
You don’t
need to add water to theDelco Freedom@ battery
installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care
of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on ~ o u I.f you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to a metal
engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to
negative (-) or you’ll get ashort that would damage
the battery and maybe other parts too.
of the vehicle with the
dead battery.
5-5
7. Don‘tletthe other end
touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) tennitla1
of the good battery.
9. Attach the cable at least
18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts
that move.
The electrical
connection is just as
b
w o d there, but the
chance of sparks getting
back to the battery is
much less.
8. Now connect the
black negative (-) cable
to the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end
touch anything until the
next step. The other end
of the negative cable
doesn’t $0 to the dead
battery. It goes to a hewy
unpainted metal part o n
the engine of the vehicle
with the dead battery.
5-6
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
1 1 . Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it
won‘t start after a few tries make sure all
connections are good. If it still won’t start, it
probably needs service.
1 A CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injureyou
badly. Keep your hands away from movingparts
once the engines are running.
I
12. Remove the cables in reverse orderto prevent
electrical shorting. Take carethat they don’t touch
each otheror any other metal.
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have a GM dealer or a professional towing
service tow your vehicle. See“Roadside Assistance” in
the index.
If your vehicle has been changed since it was
factory-new by adding things like fog lamps, aero
skirting, or special tires and wheels, these instructions
may not be correct.
-0
A
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
e Whether your vehicle has rear-wheel drive,
four-wheel drive or all-wheel drive.
The make, model and year of your vehicle.
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
Whether you can move the shift lever for the
transmission and shift the transfer case, if you
have one.
B. Good Battery
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
C. Dead Battery
When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator
know that this manual contains thesetowing
instructions. The operator may want to see them.
5-7
A CAUTION:
A CAUTION:
To help avoid injury toyou or others:
Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is
being towed.
Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
Always use separate safety chains on each
side when towing a vehicle.
Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead.
5-8
A vehicle can fall from a car carrier
if it isn’t
adequately secured. This can cause collision,
a
serious personal injury andvehicle damage. The
vehicle should be tightly secured with chains or
steel cables before it is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.) that can be cut by sharp
edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use
T-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. Never use
,J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and
suspension components.
When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key
turned to the OFF position. The steeringwheel should
be clamped in a straight-ahead position with a clamping
device designed for towing service. Do not use the
vehicle's steering column lock for this. Thetransmission
should be in NEUTRAL (N) and the transfer case, if you
have one, should be in 2HI. The parking brake should
be released.
1 -
If your vehicie has a floor mounted shifter and no
electrical power, the electrical solenoid lock must be
overridden to shift from PARK (P) to NEUTRAL (N).
Follow these steps:
1. Push the base of the shift lever boot forward with
your thumb.
2. Lift the boot and find the white solenoid lever.
3. Move the solenoid lever toward the driver's side to
unlock it.
4. While holding the solenoid lever in the unlock
position, press the shift lever button and shift into
NEUTRAL (N).
5 . Release the solenoid lever and snap the boot back
into place.
Don't have your vehicletowed on the drive wheels
unless you must. If the vehicle must be towed on the
drive wheels, be sure to follow the speed and distance
restrictions later in this section oryour transmission will
be damaged. I f these limitations must be exceeded, then
the drive wheels have to be supported on a dolly.
5-9
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipment o r
fascia/fog lamp damage will occur. Use wheel-lift
or car carrier equipment. Additional ramping
may be required for car-carrier equipment. Use
safety chains and wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage a vehicle. Damage can occurfrom
vehicle to ground or vehicle towheel-lift
equipment. To help avoid damage, install a
towing dolly and raise thevehicle until adequate
clearance is obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
Do not attach winch cables o r J-hooks to
suspension components when usingcar-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted inthe
T-hook slots.
5-10
Tow Limits -- 35 mph (56 k d ) , 30 miles@3O krn)
. .
'*Vehicles with
all- wheel-drive or four-wheel-drive and
the electrbni'ctransfer case DptibMmlasritse'a iowing
dully undwthefront wheels &hen towing from the reay:
~,
Do not tow with sling-type equipment or rea
bumper valance damagewill occur. Use whee
or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping
may be required for car-carrier equipment.
safety chains andwheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from
vehicle
to ground orvehicle to wheel-lift equipment.
Unless you have all-wheel drive,to help avoid
damage, installa towing dolly and raise the
vehicle until adequate clearanceis obtained
between the ground and/or wheel-lift equi
Do not attach winch cables or J-hooks to
suspension components whenusing car-carrier
equipment. Aiways use
T-hooks inserted in . .
'
., +y2zL.
.r
I>
.I
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
A CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you
badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away
from the engineif you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant beforeyou
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine
is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine
if
it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because
you keep
driving with no coolant, yourvehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-12
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
0
Stop after high-speed driving.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout
10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t come back on,
you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle rightaway.
1. Turn off your air conditioner.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push the accelerator until
the engine speed is about twice as fast asnormal idle
speed. Bring the engine speed back to normal idle speed
after two or three minutes. Now see if the warning stops.
But then, if you still have the warning, turn o f t h e
engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
You may decide not to liftthe hood but to get service
help right away.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.
If you get the overheatwarning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@) or
DRIVE (D) for automatic transmissions.
5-13
When you decide it's safe to lift the hood. here's what
you'll see:
hi
A CAUTION:
If your vehicle hasair conditioning, the auxiliary
electric fan under the hood can start up
even
when the engine is not running and can injure
you. Keep hands, clothingand tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don't do anything else until it cools down.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
5-14
A CAUTION:
Heater and radiatorhoses, and otherengine
parts, canbe very hot. Don’ttouch them. If you
do, you can’be burned.
Don’t run the engineif there isa leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could beburned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive thevehicle.
The coolant level shouldbe at the ADD mark.
If it isn’t, you may have a leak inthe radiator h
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere elselr
ww
l 44l
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
I f you haven‘t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn‘t at the ADD mark, add a SO/SO mixture of clenrz
w t e r (preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL”
(silicate-free) antifreeze at the coolant recovery tank.
(See ”Engine Coolant” i n the Index for more
information.)
A CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to yourcooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, canboil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolantmix. With
plain water or the wrong mix, your engine could
get too hot but >‘ouwouldn’t get the overheat
warning. k‘our engine could catch fire andyou or
others could he hurned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean
water and DKX-CWOL” coolant.
5-16
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze
and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mix.
4
I A CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
ADD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mix
directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before you do it.
5-17
A CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, andif you turn the radiator
pressure cap even a little they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap
when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap tocool if you ever have to
turn the pressure cap.
--
5-18
--
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
1 . You can remove the pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don't press
down while turning the pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss. wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
5-19
1
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL"
coolant mixture. up t o the base of the filler neck.
5-20
3. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the ,4DD mark.
5 . Put t h e cap back o n the coolant recovery tank. but
leave the pressure cap off.
A
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine fan.
7 . By this time, the coolant level inside the filler neck
may be lower. If the Ievel is lower. add more of the
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.
proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture through
the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the
filler neck.
5-21
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan.When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins fasterto provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the clutch is not engaged. This improves
fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy
vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high outside
temperatures. the fan speed increases when the clutch
engages. So you may hear an increase in fan noise. This
is normal and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely
the cooling system functioning properly. The fa11 will
slow down when additional cooling is not required and
the clutch disengages.
It's unusual for a tire to "blow out" while you're driving.
especially if you maintain your tires properly. I f air goes
o u t of a tire, it's much Inore likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have ;I"blowout." here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
5-22
If a front tire fails. the flat tire w i l l create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position. and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout. particularly on a curve. acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you'd use in a
skid. I n any rear blowout. remove your foot from the
xcelerator pedal. Get the \,chicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
\.cry bunlpy and noisy. but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire andwheel damage
by driving slowly to a levelplace. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
A CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and
roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level placeto change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brakefirmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift
lever in PARK (P) or shift a manual
transmission to FIRST (1) or
REVERSE (R).
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle
with a manual transfercase shift lever,
be sure the transfercase is in a drive
gear not in NEUTRAL (N).
4. l b r n off the engine.
5. Put the wheel blocks at the frontand
rear of the tire farthestaway from the
one being changed. That would bethe
tire on the other side of the vehicle, at
the opposite end.
--
5-23
h
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jacking equipment you'll need is stored along the
driver's rear wall. In some cases. you may have to
remove the spare tire in order to reach the jack. Your
vehicle is also equipped with work gloves and a plastic
ground mat to assist in the changing of a flat tire.
5-24
To remove your jack cover,
pull up on the latch at the
end of the cover, near the
endgate and the latch on the
top of the cover. Remove
the wheel blocks, jack and
wheel wrench.
The following instructions explain how to remove the
spare tire, depending on where it is mounted on
your vehicle.
[
NOTICE:
Never remove or restow a tire frodto a stowage
position under the vehicle while the vehicle
is
supported by a jack. Always tighten the tire fully
against the undersideof the vehicle when
restowing.
To remove the
underbody-mounted spare,
insert the chisel endof the
wheel wrench, on an angle,
into the hole in the rear
bumper. Be sure the chisel
end of the wheel wrench
connects into the hoist shaft.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire. Keep turning the wheel wrench until the spare
tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle.
When the tire has been completely lowered, tilt the
retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the
wheel opening. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
I NOTICE:
To help avoid vehicle damage, do not drive the
vehicle before the cable is restored.
If you have an inside-mounted spare tire, the tire must
be removed in order to have access to the jack storage.
To remove an inside-mounted spare tire, reach into your
tire's cover and unscrew the wing nut at the center of the
wheel. Remove it and the retainer. Unhook the tire from
the mounting bracket and remove the cover.
To remove a rear-mounted spare tire, firstmake sure
that the carrier arm is fully latched to the endgate. Then
remove the spare tire cover.
I
The locking wheel nut can
be removed by snapping the
rubber weather cover off the
face of the lock case.
Insert the key and pull
the lock case straight off.
It is not necessary to turn
the key.
Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
The tools you'll be using include the jack ( A ) and wheel
wrench (B). Your vehicle may also have an optional hub
cap removal tool.
The optional hub cap
removal tool is stowed with
Position the hub cap
removal tool in the notch
and pull straight away from
the wheel to avoid potential
damage to the hub cap and
wheel surface.
Remove the hub cap. If you have an aluminum orplastic
molded hub cap, pry it off with the chisel end of your
wheel wrench.
Some of the molded plastic hub caps have imitation
wheel nuts molded into them. The wheel wrench won’t
fit these imitation nuts, so don’t try to remove them with
the socket end of the wheel wrench.
If you have individual wheel nutcaps that cover each
nut, they must be removed in order to get to the wheel
nuts. Use the socket end of the wheel wrench to remove
the wheel nut caps.
Your wheel nut caps may attach your hub cap to the
wheel. Remove these wheel nut caps beforeyou take off
the hub cap.
5-27
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
3. Fit the jack into the appropriate hole nearest the
tlat tire.
i
L
E
&
A. Front Frame Hole
B. Rear Frame Hole (2-Door) or Spring Hanger Hole
(4- Door)
I /d CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when isitjacked upis
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injuredor killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
I NOTICE:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle to fall. To help avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage, be sure tofit the jack lift
head into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
a
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare tire
to fit.
5. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
6. Remove' any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
I A CAUTION:
~~
Never use oil or grease on studsor nuts. If you
do, the nuts might comeloose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
7. Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface.
A CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the
wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; butbe sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rustor
dirt off.
5-30
8. Put the nuts on by
hand. Make sure the
cone-shaped end is
toward the wheel.
Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is
held against the hub.
If a nut can't be turned
by hand. use the
wheel wrench and see
your dealer as soon
as possible.
.
.
I
n
A
10. Use the wrench to tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a
crisscross sequence as shown.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-31
A CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
loose
and even come off. This could lead toan accident.
Be sure to use the correctwheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, besure toget new GNI original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhereas soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to95 lb-ft
(130 Nom).
Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools
A CAUTION:
Storing a jack,a tire or other equipment
in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. Ina sudden stopor collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the properplace.
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to
brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and
to the proper
torque specification.
An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should always
be stored under thevehicle with the hoist.
However, storing it thatway for anextended
period could damage thewheel. To avoid this,
have the wheel repaired as soon as possible.
Follow this diagram to
store the underbody-mounted spare.
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle,
with the valve stem pointed down andto the rear.
A. Retainer
2. Pull the retainer through the wheel.
B. Valve Stem
3. Put the chisel end of the wheel wrench, on an angle,
(Pointed Down)
C. Spare or Flat Tire
D.
E.
E
G.
Spring
Wheel Wrench
Lower
Raise
H. Hoist Arm
through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist
shaft. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise until the tire
is raised against the underside of the vehicle.
You will hear two “clicks“ whenthe tire is secure,
but pull on the tire to make sure.
Y
;
BJ
5-33
Follow this diagram for the inside-mounted spare.
Follow this diagram for the rear-mounted spare.
C7
C
D
i
- i,
A. Spare or Flat Tire
A. Wheel Carrier
B. Retainer (Two-Wheel Drive)
B. Spare Tire
C . Nut
C. Wheel Nut and Locking Nut Cylinder
D. Retainer (Four-wheel Drive)
Reinstall the locking wheel n u t using the wheel wrench.
Then push the lock case onto the lug nut until it stops.
The key does n o t have to be inserted into the lock. Push
the lock case to be sure it is secured. The special lug nut
and lock case is not intended to be used on any road
wheel. only on the spare wheel carrier. Tighten the nuts
on the wheel carrier to 22 to 32 Ib-ft (30 to 40 N-m).
E. Wheel Carrier
E Hook
Return the jack,wheel wrench and wheel blocks to the
proper location in your vehicle’s rear area. Secure the
items and replace the jack cover.
II A CAUTION:
Make sure the tire andcarrier are secure.
Driving with the tire or carrier unlatched could
injure pedestrians or damage the vehicle.
I
Compact Spare Tire(If Equipped)
Although the compact spare tirewas fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.Check
the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi
(420 kPa).
-
A. Retainer
E Wheel Blocks
B. Rubber Band
(Some Modelsj
G . Hub Cap Removal
Tool (‘SomeModels)
C . Work Gloves
H. Wheel Wrench
D. Mat
I. Jack
E. Jack Storage Cover
J. JackingInstructions
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. Thecompact
spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distancesup to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire
repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best
to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you
can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in
case you need it again.
5-35
NOTICE:
When the compact spare
is installed, don’t take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other partsof your vehicle.
Don‘t use your compact spare on other vehicles
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won‘t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t tit your compact spare. Using
them can damage yourvehicle and can damage
the chains too. Don’t use tire chains onyour
compact spare.
5-36
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
What you don‘t want to do when your vehicle is stuck is
to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking“ can help you get out when you’re stuck, but
you must use caution.
A CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, andyou or others could be injured. And,
the transmission or other parts
of the vehicle can
overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fireor other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible.
Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 k m h ) as shown
on the speedometer.
I NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
I
Using the Recovery Hooks
P
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear
(or with a manual transmission, between FIRST ( 1) or
SECOND ( 2 ) and REVERSE(R)), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear. If that doesn’t get you
out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
Or, you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has
them. If you do need to be towed out, see ”Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.
The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your
vehicle. You may need to use them if you’re stuck
off-road and need to be pulled to some place where you
can continue driving.
5-37
IA
CAUTION:
The recovery hooks, when used, are undera lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never
pull on the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks
could break off and you or others couldbe
injured from the chainor cable snapping back.
NOTICE:
Never use the recovery hooks to tow thevehicle.
Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not
be covered by warranty.
5-38
I
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section beginswith service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricantlevels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-9
6- 13
6- 14
6-18
6- 19
6-20
6-2 1
6-23
6-26
6-26
6-26
6-27
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Air Cleaner
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch
Rear Axle
Four-wheel Drive and All-Wheel Drive
Engine Coolant
Radiator Pressure Cap
Thermostat
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
6-28
6-32
6-3 3
6-3 8
6-40
6-49
6-49
6-52
6-54
6-57
6-58
6-58
6-58
6-62
6-63
6-64
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Appearance Care Materials Chart
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts IdentificationLabel
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Service
Your GM dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you
to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You‘ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you’ll wantto keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
n
Delco
Doing Your Own Service Work
6-2
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work. see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See ”Maintenance Record?’in the Index.
I A CAUTION:
You can be injured and yourvehicle could be
damaged if you try to do servicework on a
vehicle without knowing enough aboutit.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipmentto the Outsideof
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your GM dealer before adding equipment tothe outside
of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher. At a minimum, it should meet specifications
ASTM D48 14 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93
in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have been
developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers
Association ( AAMA) for better vehicle performance
and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA
specification could provide improved driveability and
emission control system protection compared to
other g a ~ )i nes.
l
Be S C I I -the
~ p o s ~ c octane
l
is at least 87. If the octane is
less than 87. y o u m a , gct a heavy knocking noise when
YOLI driirc. If’ it‘\ hac1 crlough. it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher andyou
still hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noisewhen
you’re accelerating or drivingup a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octanefuel to get rid
of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood tune-up label), it
is designed to operateon fuels that meet California
specifications. If such fuels are not available in states
adopting California emissions standards,your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle
may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to your
authorized GM dealer for diagnosis to determine the
cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the
cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
6-3
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions containan octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT);
ask your service station operatorwhether or not his fuel
contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the
use of such gasolines. If fuels containing MMT are used,
spark plug life may be reduced and your emission
control system performance may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
I NOTICE:
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives thatwill help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add
anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing
oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol. and
reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to
help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you
use these gasolines if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
If you plan on driving in another country outside the United
States or Canada. the proper fuel
may be hard to find. Never
not recommended in the
use leaded gasoline
or any other fuei
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of
improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, askan auto club. or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
You can also write us at the following address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VTN).
General Motors International Product Center
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa. Ontario L 1H 8P7
6-4
Your vehicle was not designedfor fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
To take off the cap, turn
it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The
cap has a spring in it; if
you let go of the cap
too soon, it will spring
back to the right.
The fuel capis behind
a hinged door on the
driver’s sideof
your vehicle.
A CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor ishighly flammable. It burns
violently, and that cancause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away fromgasoline.
A CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can sprayout on you if you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open thefuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all theway.
6-5
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See "Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle" in the Index.
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap. The diagnosticsystem can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See "Malfunction Indicator Lamp" in
the Index.
Checking Things Under the Hood
To open the hood, first pull
the handle inside the vehicle
on the lower driver's side of
the instrument panel.
1
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, itmay not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system may
be
damaged. See "Malfunction Indicator Lamp" in
the Index.
6-6
Then go t o the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.
I A CAUTION:
Things that burn can geton hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and
put the hood prop into the slot in the hood. You may
have a lamp that comes on when you lift the hood.
6-7
When you lift the hood. you'll see these items:
*
C
B
--
."*f
. ..
A. Battery
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Engine Oil Dipstick
6-8
D. Transmission Dipstick
E. Engine Oil Fill
F. Power Steering Reservoir
G. Brake Master Cylinder
H. Air Cleaner
I. Windshield Washer Fluid
Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps areon
properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from theslot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer.
Checking Engine Oil
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with apaper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down,and check the level.
Then just pull the hood down firmly to close. It will
latch when dropped from 10 to12 inches (25 to 30 cm)
without pressing on the hood.
Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engineoil every timeyou
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The oil dipstick is a
yellow ring.
Turn off the engine and give
the oil a few minutes to
drain back into the oil pan.
If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the
actual level.
6-9
When to Add Oil
What Kind of Oil to Use
If the oil is at or below the ADD line. then you'll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see "Capacitiesand Specifications"
in the Index.
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the "Starburst" symbol. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American
Petroleunl Institute (API). Do not use any oil which
does not carry this Starburst symbol.
NOTICE:
Don't add too much oil. If your engine has so
much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area thatshows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
Be sure to fill i t enough to put the level somewhere i n
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you're through.
If you change your own oil. be sure you use oil that has
the Starburst symbol o n the front of the oil container. If
you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put
into your engine is American Petroleum Institute
certified for gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle. as shown in the following chart:
6-10
SAL VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AN0 COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THL'EXPECTEDTEMPERATURE RANGE.
HOT
WEATHER
LOOK
FOR THIS
SYMBOL
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use SAE 1OW-30 if it's going
to be 0" F (- 18 " C )or above. Thesenumbers on an oil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.
I NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
"Starburst" symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage not
covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
-20°F (-29OC), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold startingand better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
'---.l
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER
GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
6-11
Engine Oil Additives
Don't add anything to your oil. Your GM dealer is ready
to advise if you think something should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you. use the short tripkity
. maintenance schedule:
a Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles ( 8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
a Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
a You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or
off-road frequently.
0
You frequently tow a trailer or use a currier on top of
your vehicle.
a The vehicle is used for delivery service. police, taxi
or other commercial application.
6-12
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3.000 miles ( 5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever
occllrs first.
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles ( 12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first. Drivinga vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to
break down slower.
Remote Oil Filter (Four-wheel Drive)
The access door for the remote oil filter is in the steering
linkage shield assembly located under the radiator
support. Twist the screw to unlock or lock the door.
Make sure if you open the door. it is securely closed
I
finished.
when ~ O L are
What to Do with Used Oil
Air Cleaner
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don't let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containingused engine oil. (See
the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil. be sure to drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal.Don't ever dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash. pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodiesof water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or alocal recycling
center for help.
cr
To remove the air cleaner, remove the wing nuts that
hold the cover on. Remove the cover and lift out the
air filter.
Insert a new air filter, then replace the air cleaner cover.
Tighten the wing nuts to hold the cover in place.
-
..
6-13
A CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner
off can
cause you or others tobe burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans theair, it stops flameif the engine
backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine
backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working on the engine with
the air cleaneroff.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(53 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
NOTICE:
Uses such as found in taxi. police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
If the air cleaneris off, a backfire can causea
damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
into your engine, whichwill damage it. Always
have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving.
6-14
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult,you may
choose to have this done atyour GM dealership
Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading
on the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be
' sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
~
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
0
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
0
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (83OC
to 93°C).
Checking Transmission Fluid Hot
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F
(IOOC). If it's colder than 50°F (IOOC ), drive the
vehicle in DRIVE (D) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes. Then
follow the hot check procedures.
6-15
Checking Transmission Fluid Cold
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
A cold check is made after the vehicle has been sitting
for eight hours ormore with the engine off and is used
only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five
minutes if outside temperatures are50°F ( 10°C) or
more. If it's colder than 50°F ( I O O C ) , you may have to
idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low
during a cold check. you mrrst perform a hot check
before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate
reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Hot or Cold
0
Park your \.tthicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
0
With the parking brake applied. place the shift lever
i n PARK ( P ) .
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and
wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push i t back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then p ~ d li t back out again.
6-16
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat
kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Add fluid only after checking thetransmission fluid
HOT. (A COLD check is used only as a reference.) If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot
check. it doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area for a
cold checkor in the HOT area or cross-hatched area
for a hot check.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
I
~
NOTICE:
~~
~
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON@-111,because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-111
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
6-17
Manual Transmission Fluid
When to Check
A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is
changed. However, the fluid in your manual
transmission doesn't require changing.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is
cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transmission case.
Then. follow these steps:
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult. you
rnay choose to have this done at your GM dealership
Service Department.
If you do it yourself. be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading.
I NOTICE:
i Too much or too little fluid can damage your
1
transmission. Too much can mean that someof
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting afire. Be
sure to get an accurate readingif you check your
transmission fluid.
6-18
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is LIPto the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good. install the p l ~ ~mgd be sure
it is f ~ l l l yseated. If the fluid level is low. add more
fluid as described in the next steps.
How to Add Fluid
When to Check and What to Use
Here’s how to add fluid. Referto the Maintenance
Schedule to determinewhat kind of fluid to use. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
I. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plughole. Add only enough
fluid tobring the fluid levelup to the bottom of the
filler plughole.
3. Install the filler plug.Be sure the plug is fully seated.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch systemin your vehicle is
self-adjusting. A slight amount of play (1/4 inch to
112 inch or 6 mm to 12 mm) in the pedal is normal.
It isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your clutch fluid. Adding
fluid won’t correct a leak. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule, Owner Checks
and
Services, to determine how oftenyou should check the
fluid level in your clutch master cylinderreservoir and
for the proper fluid. See “Owner Checksand Services”
and “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”in
the Index.
6-19
How to Check
How to Check Lubricant
The proper fluid should be added if the level does not
reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it's in place in
the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap.
Rear Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
"Scheduled Maintenance Services" in the Index.
If the level is below the bottom of the fiIler plug hole,
you'll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See "Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants" in the Index.
6-20
Four-wheel Drive and
All-Wheel Drive
How to Check Lubricant
Most lubricant checks in this section also applyto
four-wheel-drive vehicles. However, they have two
additional systems that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections’’ in the Index.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
6-21
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you‘ll need to add some lubricant.
If the differential is at operating temperature (warm),
add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
If the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise
the level to 1/2 inch (: 12 mm) below the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See ”Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
6-22
Engine Coolant
The cooling s stem in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL J engine coolant. This cooIant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL’ extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of water and the DEX-COOL@coolant
for your vehicle will:
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265 “ F ( 129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant,it is important thatyou use
only DEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL@
is added to
I the system, premature engine, heater coreor
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused
by the use
of coolant other than DEX-COOL@
is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
--
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably
distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL@ coolant which
won’t damage aluminum parts. If you use this mixture.
you don’t need to add anything else.
6-23
A CAUTION:
Adding only plain waterto yourcooling system
can be dangerous. Plainwater, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before theproper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’scoolant warning
system is setfor the proper
coolant mix. With
plain water or thewrong mix, your engine could
get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire andyou or
others could be burned.Use a 5060 mix of clean
water and DEX-COOL@coolant.
NOTICE:
If you usean impropercoolant mix, your engine
could overheat andbe badly damaged. The
repair cost wouldn’t be coveredby your
warranty. Too much waterin the mix can freeze
and crack theengine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear,
have your dealer checkyour cooling system.
I NOTICE:
If you use the propercoolant, you don’t have to
add extra inhibitorsor additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
6-24
Turning the radiator pressure cap
when the
engine and'radiator arehot can allow steam and
scalding liquidsto blow out and burnyou badly.
With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost
never have toadd coolant at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a
little when the engine and radiator arehot.
--
--
I
.dd DEX-COOL@coolant mixture at the vnlrnmk, but be careful not to sp"'
;
+
Radiator Pressure Cap
Thermostat
a
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in the engine coolant system.The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
Power Steering Fluid
...
NOTICE:
Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installedto
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrowson the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.
6-26
... .,
-
--.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly checkpower steering
fluid unlessyou suspect thereis a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
How To Check Power Steering Fluid
When the engine compartmentis cool, wipe the cap and
the top of the reservoir clean,then unscrew the cap and
wipe the dipstickwith a clean rag.Replace the cap and
completely tightenit. Then remove the cap again and
look at the fluid level onthe dipstick.
The level shouldbe between the ADD and FULL marks.
If necessary, add only enough fluid
to bring the level up
to the proper range.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failureto use the proper
tluid can cause leaksand damage hoses and seals.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructionsbefore use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
1
.
i
L
. .
‘r
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY with the
washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full.
7
6-27
NOTICE:
0
0
0
0
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer's instructions for
adding water.
Don't mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid, Water can cause the solutionto freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other partsof the washer system.Also,
water doesn't clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it's very cold. This
allows for expansionif freezing occurs,
which could damage the tankif it is
completely full.
Don't use radiator antifreeze in your
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
c
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasonswhy the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason isthat fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have
your brake system fixed, since aleak means that sooner
or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work
at all.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
check your brake fluid. See“Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
Checking Brake Fluid
I
So, it isn’t a good idea to “topoff’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
IA
&-
CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the
engine. The fluid will burn if the engineis hot
enough. You or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the windows on the brake fluid reservoir.
The fluid levels shouldbe above MIN. If they aren’t,
have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,make
sure the levels areabove MIN and below the top of
each window.
6-29
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 1 1 (GM Part
No. 12377967). Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
NOTICE:
@
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
1A
CAUTION:
With the wrong kindof fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work
well, or they
may not even work at all. This could causea
crash. Always use the proper brake
fluid.
6-30
1
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
just a few
brake system parts. For example,
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone putin the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This couldbe a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
If your brake pedal goes down farther thannormal. your
rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by
backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts.
6-32
When you replace parts of your braking system -- for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
have to have new ones put in -- be sure you get new
approved GM replacement parts. If you don‘t, your
brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if
someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your
vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes
can change -- for the worse. The braking performance
you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if
someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Every new vehicle has a Delco Freedom@battery. You
never have to add water to one of these. When it’s time
for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom
battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown
on the original battery’s label.
Vehicle Storage
Bulb Replacement
If you’re not going todnve your vehicle for 25 days or
more, take off the black, negative (-) cable from the battery.
This will help keep your battery fiom running down.
Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all the lamps
are off and the engine isn’t running. See “Replacement
Bulbs” in the Index.
I A CAUTION:
Halogen Bulbs
,
Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas
that canexplode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tipson working around a battery without
getting hurt.
I /d
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
bulb. You or
can burst if you drop or scratch the
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructionson the bulbpackage.
Contact your dealerto learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
6-33
Headlamps
2. Pull the headlamp out
and remove the retainer.
Sealed Beam Lamps
1. Remove the screws from
the headlamp retainer.
I
3. Unplug and remove the headlamp.
4. Plug in the new headlamp and put it i n place.
5 . Put the retainer on the headlamp and install and
tighten the screws.
6-34
4. Unplug the electrical connector.
Composite Headlamps
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the black
protective caps from the
removal pins at the top
of the radiator support.
Use a hex socket to
unscrew the pins.
c
I , .
.*::g>
1.21
3. Pull the headlamp lens
assembly out. (Some
vehicles may have
side-by-side bulbs.)
, ' ..-g
..
'
5. Turn the bulb
counterclockwise to
remove it.
6. Put the new bulb into the headlamp lens assembly
and turn it clockwise until it is tight.
7. Plug in the electrical connector.
8. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the
vehicle. Install and tighten the screws.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
2. Turn the socket counterclockwise and pull it out.
If you have fog lamps. the fog lamp bracket must be
removed before you can replace the front turn
signal lamps.
3. Holding the base of the bulb, pull the bulb straight
out of the socket.
4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
5. Put the socket back into the turn signal lamp
assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks
into place.
Front Sidemarker Lamps
L
1
1. Remove the lens retaining screws.
-.
? Remove the sidemarker lens from the radiator grille.
U
3. Turn the bulb and socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb and socket from the lens.
5 . Install the new bulb and socket to the
sidemarker lens.
I . Reach under the bumper and behind the turn s i p a l
lamp assembly.
6. Rotate the bulb and socket one-quarter of a
turn clockwise.
7 . Install the sidemarker lens to the radiator grille.
8. Insert the tabs into the locators.
9. Install and tighten the screws.
6-36
6. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until
Taillamps
it clicks.
1. Open the endgate.
2. Remove the two screws
from the lamp assembly.
7. Put the socket into the lamp assembly and turn the
socket clockwise until it locks into place.
8. Install the lamp assembly and screws.
9. Close the endgate.
Underhood Lamp
1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the
underhood lamp assembly.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Disconnect the ground wire.
4. Remove the lamp assembly from the hood.
3. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.
5 . Install the new bulb.
4. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it. Push
the tab in while you turn the socket
counterclockwise.
6. Replace the assembly. Install and tighten the screws.
5. Holding the base of the bulb, pull the bulb straight
out of the socket.
7 . Connect the ground wire.
8. Connect the electrical connectorto the
lamp assembly.
Front Reading Lamps
4. Press the new bulb into place.
1. Use a coin or small screwdriverto unscrew the
center of the overhead console lamp lens while
pressing in on the lamp assembly.
5 . Slide the side tabs of the lens under the side of the
vanity assembly frame.
2 . Remove the lamp assembly from the console.
7. Snap the lens into the frame.
3. Remove the bulb assembly from the lamp assembly.
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the base.
5 . Put a new bulb into the bulb base.
6 . Install the bulb assembly into the lamp assembly.
7. Place the lamp assembly into the console, turning it
to latch it in place.
8. Install the lens.
Vanity Mirror Lamps
1. Insert the blade of a small screwdriver into the center
slot at the bottom of the lens.
2. Gently pry the screwdriver down in order to lift out
the lens.
3. Pry out the bulb.
6-38
6. Rotate the lens downward.
See "Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts" in the
Index for the proper type of replacement blade.
I
NOTICE:
Use care when removingor installing a blade
assembly. Accidental bumping can causethe arm
to fall back and strike the windshield.
1. To remove the old wiper blades. lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
1
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked by
the bottom claws of the blade assembly.At the
notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
A
/
‘0
A. Blade Assembly
D. Blade Pivot
B. Arm Assembly
E. Hook Slot
C . Locking Tab
E Arm Hook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab.
Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from
the wiper arm hook.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade claws
(A). Slide the insert all the way through the blade
claws at the opposite end(B). The plastic caps ( C )
will be forced off as the insert is fully inserted.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws areproperly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
6-39
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
See “Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement’‘ in this
section for instructions on how to change the backglass
wiper blade. The backglass wiper blade will not lock in
a vertical position like the windshield wiper blade, so
care should be used when pulling it away from
the vehicle.
Tires
Your new ve.hicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service. see
your warranty booklet for details.
C
B
-~
A. Claw in IVotch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
6 . Put the hlxit. a~st.mblypivot in the wiper arm hook.
Pull up u n t i l fhc pi\.ot locking tab locks in the
h o o k slot.
7. Caref’uIIv Io\t.cr the wiper arm and blade assembly
o n t o the \vindshiclci.
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
~
~~~
~~~
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
0 Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out anda serious
accident. See “Loading YourVehicle” in
the Index.
0 Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires arecold.
0 Overinflated tires are more
likely to be
cut, punctured or brokenby a sudden
impact such as whenyou hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
0 Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged. replace them.
--
The CertificationRire label,which is on the driver’s
door edge, above the door latch, shows
the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation),
you can
get the following:
0 Too much flexing
0 Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
0 Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
6-41
I NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too muchair (overinflation),
you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Badhandling
Roughride
Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Also. check the
tire pressure of the spare tire.
If you have a compact spare tire. it should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can't tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
6-42
I
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6.000 to 8.000 miles
(10 000 t o 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear. rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See "When It's Time for New Tires" and
"Wheel Replacement'' later in this section for
more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See "Scheduled
Maintenance Services" in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
iI
LWA
r
I
Rust or dirton a wheel, or on theparts to which
it is fastened, can makewheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When you change awheel, remove
any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel
attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to dothis; but be
sure touse a scraper orwire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirtoff. (See
“Changing a Flat Tire”in the Index.)
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, don’t include
it
in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjustthe front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the
CertificationRire label. Makecertain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in
the Index.
6-43
When It's Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it's
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch ( 1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
0
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire's rubber.
0
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
6-44
0
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can't be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need. look at
the CertificatiodTire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire's sidewall. When you get new tires.
t
oet ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
t o give proper endurance. handling, speed rating,
traction. ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an "MS"
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial)as your original tires.
I A CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial andbias-belted tires), thevehicle may not
handle properly, andyou could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to yourvehicle. Be sure touse the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
It’s all rightto drive with your compact spare
(if you have one). It was developed for use on
your vehicle.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates tothe system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The
grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some lirnited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear gradeis a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
( 1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantlyfrom the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
6-45
Traction
-- A, B, C
The traction sades, from highest to lowesr. are A. B. and
C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction per-fornmance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on braking (straight ahead)traction tests and does not
include cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature
-- A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest). B, and C.
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life.
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separatelyo r in combination.
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other. the alipment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent. cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel.
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air. replace it (except some aluminum
wheels. which can sometimes be repaired). See your
GM dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
6-46
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
I A CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking andhandling of your
vehicle, make your tireslose air and make you
lose control. You could havea collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tireor tire
chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
Used ’Replacement Wheels
I A CAUTION:
Putting aused wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been usedor
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
6-47
Tire Chains
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE:
If your vehicle has P235/75R15,P235/70R15 or
31x10.50Rl5LT/C size tires, don’tuse tire chains.
They candamage your vehicle because there’s
not enoughclearance.
Use another type of traction device onlyif its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tiresize combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
NOTICE: (Continued)
,
If you do finda traction device that will fit, install
them on the reartires.
If you have other size tires, use tire chains only
where legal and only when you must. Use only
SAE Class “S”’type chainsthat arethe proper
size for yourtires. Install themon the drive axle
tires (four-wheel-drive vehicles canuse chains on
both axles) and tighten them as tightly as possible
with the endssecurely fastened. Drive slowlyand
follow the chain manufacturer’sinstructions.. If
you can .hear the chains contacting
your vehicle,
stop and retighten them.
If the contact continues,
slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or
spinning the wheels with chains on will damage
your vehicle.
6-48
I
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumesin a closed space.
When you use anything from a container
to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’swarnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
CarbonTetrachloride
Acetone
PaintThinner
0
Turpentine
0
LacquerThinner
0
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damageyour vehicle. too.
Don’t use any of these unless thismanual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
ReducingAgents
Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner oftento get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl or leatherwith a clean, damp cloth.
Your GM dealer has two cleaners, a solvent-type spot
lifter and a foam-type powdered cleaner. They will clean
normal spots and stainsvery weil. Do not use them on
vinyl or leather.
Here are some cleaningtips:
1. Always read the instructions on me cleaner label.
2. Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
3. Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A softbrush may be used if stains
are stubborn.
4. Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area
only. If you use them, don’t saturatethe stained area.
5. If a ring forms after spot cleaning, cleanthe entire
area immediately orit will set.
Using Foam-Type Cleaneron Fabric
Using Solvent-Qpe Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loosedirt.
First. see if you have to use solvent-type cleaner at all.
Some spots and stains will clean off better with just
water and mild soap.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the
directions on the container label.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don‘t
saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5 . As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
6. Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge.
7. Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper towel
or cloth.
8. Dry it imnlediately with a blow dryer.
9. Wipe with a clean cloth.
6-50
If you need to use a solvent:
1. Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with
a clean. dull knife or scraper.
2 . Use very little cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths
(preferably cheesecloth).Cleaning should start at the
outside of the stain, “feathering” toward the center.
3. Keep changing to a clean section of the cloth.
4. When you clean it stain from fabric. immediately
dry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent a
cleaning ring.
Fabric Protection
Non-Greasy Stains
that has been
Your vehicle has upholstery and carpet
treated with Scotchgard" Fabric Protector, a 3M
product. It protects fabricsby repelling oil and water,
which are the carriersof most stains. Even with this
protection, you still need to cleanyour upholstery and
carpet often to keepit looking new.
Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit
juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood can
be removed as follows:
Further information on cleaningis available by calling
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6 167).
Special Cleaning Problems
Greasy or Oily Stains
Stains causedby grease, oil,butter, margarine, shoe
polish, coffee with cream, chewing gum, cosmetic
creams, vegetable oils,wax crayon, tar and asphalt can
be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Follow the solvent-type instructions
described earlier.
Shoe polish,wax crayon, tarand asphalt will stain if left
on a vehicle's seat fabric. Theyshould be removed as
will
soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner
dissolve them and may cause
them to spread.
1. Carefully scrapeoff excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers aftercleaning vomit or urine, treat
the area with a waterhaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner.
Combination Stains
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stainscan be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry.
3. If a stain remains, cleanit with solvent-type cleaner.
6-51
Cleaning Vinyl
Cleaning the Top of the InstrumentPanel
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
0
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you
don't get them 08quickly. Use a clean cloth and a
vinylkather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning Leather
use a sort cloth with lukewarm water ana a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
0
For stubborn stains. use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
0
iVLJ\.tl\.
use oils. varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
clerlners. furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
Soiled or staincd leather should be cleaned
ir1lmedi;ttcly. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish. i t CUI 11x111the leather.
6-52
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
I A CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they
might not be able to provide adequateprotection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soapand
lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM
Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on
interior glass.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If
abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outsideof the
Windshield, Backglass and
Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer. or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax. sap o r other rnaterial may be on the blade
or windshicld.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon Ami@ Powder(non-scratching
glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse
it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. (See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
6-53
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Finish Care
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.)
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dish or carwashing (mild detergent) soaps.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or
that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, orthey could stain. Dry the finish with a
soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid
surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior LampsLenses
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a liquid
hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soapto clean
exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under
“Washing Your Vehicle.“
6-54
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
I
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoatklearcoat paint finishmay dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts. ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings. chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.. can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subjectto aging, weather
and chemical faIIout that can taketheir toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soapto clean aluminum. A
coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended
for all bright metal parts.
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners
or
abrasive cleaning brushes on them
because you could
damage the surface.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic carwash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These
brushes can also damage the surfaceof these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
I NOTICE:
When applyinga tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
surfaces on the bodyor wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint finish.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the
body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced torestore corrosion protection.
Finish Damage
Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fractures ordeep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Some weather and atmospheric conditionscan create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaceson your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
the paint surface.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control
can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed.
accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody
parts such as fuel lines, frame. floorpan and exhaust system
even though they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.
6-56
Although no defect in the paint job causes this. GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase.
whichever occurs first.
Appearance Care Materials Chart
2377964
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Cleaning Wax
Protectsremoves
finish
and
fine scratches
12377966
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Finish Enhancer
cleans
Spot
paint and gives high luster
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
**Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.
See ‘‘Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
6-57
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)
0
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
I GM I
I
SAMPLE4UXVM072675
ENGINE/1997
T
CODE
MODEL YEAR
\
IE‘ I
ASSEMBLY
PLANT
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front cornerof the instrument panel. on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine. specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You‘ll find this label on the inside of the glove box. It’s
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label is:
6-58
a list of all production options and special equipment.
I
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-on Electrical Equipment
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first. Some electrical
equipment can damage your vehicle and the
damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle. see ”Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle’’ in the Index.
Headlamps
The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit
breaker. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go
on and off, or in some cases to remainoff. If this happens,
have your headlamp wiring checked rightaway.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected aby
circuit breaker
and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the
wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is
caused
by some electrical problem,be sure to get it fixed.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don't have a
spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block is at the
driver's end of the
instrument panel.
Power Windows and Other PowerOptions
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires causedby electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
Remove the cover by turning the fastener
counterclockwise. Extra fuses and the fuse extractor are
provided in the cover. To reinstall the fuse panel cover,
push in and turn the fastener clockwise.
r
n
r
l
WOO
d
co
FuseKircuit
Breaker
Usage
ACCY
A
w
1
2
3
FuseKircuit
Breaker
Usage
A
Power Door Locks, Power Seat,
Power Seat Lumbar, Remote
Keyless Entry
B
Power Windows, Sunroof
Module/Motor
6-60
4
Stoplamps, Hazard Lamps, Chime,
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Relay,
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
Dome Lamps. Cargo Lamps, Visor
Vanity Mirror, Cigarette Lighter,
Inside Rearview Mirror Lamp,
Overhead Console Lamps, Glove
Box Lamp, Horns, Horn Relay, IP
Courtesy Lamps, Power Outside
Rearview Mirror, Liftglass Release
Motor, Illuminated Entry Module
Parking Lamps, License Plate Lamps.
Electric Shift Transfer Case Module,
Underhood Lamp, Rear Wiper. Fog
Lamp Relay, Door Switch Lamp,
Ashtray Lamp, Headlamp Switch
A/C Compressor Relay, Cluster
Chime Module, DRL Relay Coil,
Four-Wheel-Drive Indicator Lamp,
DRL Module, Rear Defog Timer,
Transfer Case Control Module
Ignition, SIR Redundant Ignition,
R K E Ignition. Fuel Sender Module
FuseKircuit
Breaker
Usage
Oxygen Sensor Heater, Exhaust Gas
5
Recirculation, Cam Sensor, CANN.
Purge, Canister Vent Solenoid, Mass
Airflow Sensor, Cam Shaft Sensor
Blower Motor, Temperature Door
6
Motor, HI Blower Relay Coil
Power Auxiliary Outlets, Assembly
7
Line Diagnostic Link
Rear Window Defogger
8
PCMNCM Battery, Fuel Pump
9
PCM/VCM Ignition, Injectors, Crank
10
Sensor, Coil Driver Module
Radio, Inside Rearview Mirror Map
11
Lamp, Overhead Console Reading
Lamps, Rear Wiper, Rear Washer,
Overhead Console Display
Anti-Lock Braking System, VCM
12
IGN-3
Clock, Radio Battery, CD Player
13
A/C Compressor Battery Feed
14
Daytime Running Lamps; Fog
15
Lamps, Fog Lamp Relay
FuseKircuit
Breaker
Usage
16
Turn Signals and Back-up Lamps,
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock
Solenoid
17
Windshield Washer, Windshield
Wiper Motor
18
Not Used
19
Electric Shift Transfer Case
20
Crank Relay, Air Bag Module
21
Not Used
22
Air Bag Module
23
Cluster Illumination, Radio
Illumination, Heater Lamp,4WD
Illumination, Chime Module,Fog
Lamp Illumination, Rear Wiper
Switch Illumination, Rear Defogger
Switch Illumination, Liftglass
Release Switch Illumination,
Overhead Console Illumination
PRNDL Power, 4L6OE Automatic
24
Transmission
6-61
Replacement Bulbs
Quantity
Number
Halogen Headlamps, Sealed Beam
2
2E 1
Halogen Headlamps, Composite Low-Beam
3
9006 HB4
Halogen Headlamps, Composite High-Beam
2
9005 HB3
Tail and Stoplamps
4
3057
Front Sidemarker Lamps
2
194
Turn Signal Lamps
-3
3157 NA
Underhood Lamp
1
93
Visor Vanity Mirror Lamps
4
74
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
-3
194
Lamps
6-62
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Description . . . . . . . . . . . . “VORTEC” 4300
V6
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VINCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W
1-6-5-4-3-2
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 at 4,400 rpm
Thermostat Specification . . . . . . . . . . . 195°F(91°C)
Spark Plug Gap . . . . . . . . . . 0.045 inches (0.114cm)
Wheels and Tires
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Ib-ft (130 N-m)
Tire Pressure . . . . . . See the Certificationflire label.
See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are
based on the latest information available at the time
of
printing, and are subjectto change. If a part listed in this
manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle
when it was built, or if you have any questions, please
contact your GM truck dealer.
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12551472
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PF52
A1 163C
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCVValve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CV746C
Automatic Transmission Filter Kit . . . . . . 24200796
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 4 1-932
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GF48 1
Front Windshield
Wiper Blade . . . . . . . . . . Trico (20 inches/50.8cm)
Backglass Wiper Blade . . . Trico (14 inched35.6 cm)
6-63
Capacities (Approximate)
Cooling System*
Automatic Trans. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.7 quarts ( 1 I . 1 L)
Manual Trans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.9 quarts ( 1 1.3 L)
Crankcase* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 quarts (4.3 L)
Automatic Transmission
(Drain and Refill)" . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 quarts (4.7 L)
Differential Fluid
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 pints (1.9 L )
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6 pints (1.2 L)
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19 gallons (72 L)
A/C Refrigerant . . 30 oz. or 2 lbs. (0.9 kg) of R- 134a
*After refill,the level must be checked.
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerantsare the same. If the
air conditioning system in your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used. If
you're not sure, ask your GM dealer.
Vehicle Dimensions*
Wheelbase
S/T10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100.5 inches (255.3 cm)
S/T10506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107.0 1.nches (27 I .8 cm)
Length
S10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175.0 nches (444.5 cm)
T10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175.4 nches (445.5 cm)
S/T 10506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 I .5 inches (46 I .O cm)
Height
S10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66.0 inches (167.6 cm)
T10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66.9 inches (170.0cm)
S10506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65.9 inches (167.4 cm)
T10506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67.0 inches (170.2 cm)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67.8 inches ( 172.2 cm)
Front Tread
S Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.0 inches (139.6 cm)
T Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57.3 inches (145.4 cm)
Rear Tread
S Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.7 inches (138.8 cm)
T Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.1 inches ( 139.9 cm)
*Figures reflect base equipment only.
6-64
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required foryour vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services toretain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-6
7-6
Introduction
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Short Trip/City Definition
Short TripKity Intervals
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
7-7
7-30
7-46
7-50
7-52
7-55
Short
Trip/City
Maintenance
Schedule
Long
Trip/Highway
Maintenance
Schedule
Part B: OwnerChecksandServices
Part C: PeriodicMaintenanceInspections
Part D: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
Introduction
IMPORTANT:
Your Vehicle and the Environment
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
.VELAND CHANGE
RECOMMENDED
protection
7-2
I
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition. please maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
The remainder of this section is dividedinto five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
A CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can
be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services”tells you
what should be checked and when. It also explains
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains important inspections that your
GM dealer’s
service department or another qualified servicecenter
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists
some products GM recommends to help keep your
vehicle properly maintained. These products, ortheir
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work
yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place for
you to record the maintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure to write it down in this part. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance should be done.
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
If you are skilled enough to do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get the service
information GM publishes. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
7-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don't know
exactly how you'll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few timesa week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot. dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or
you may drive it to work. to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their GM
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need
more frequent checks and replacements than you'll find
in the schedules in this section. So please read this
section and note how you drive. If you.have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your GM dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them. If you
s
00 to your dealer for your service needs. you'll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
7-4
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D.
Make sure whoever services your vehicleuses these. All
parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done
before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
0
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle's
Certification/Tire label. See "Loading Your Vehicle"
in the Index.
0
are driven on reasonable road surfxes within legal
driving limits.
0
are driven off-road in the recommended manner. See
"Off-Road Driving With Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle'' in the Index.
use the recommended fuel. See "Fuel" in the Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you'll need to decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here's how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Maintenance Schedule
I Short TripKity Definition
Short TripKity Intervals
-
~-
Follow the Short TripKity Maintenance Scheduleif any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or
off-road frequently.
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police,taxi
or other commercial application.
One of the reasonsyou should follow this schedule fi you
operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that
these conditions cause engineoil to break down sooney:
I Short TripKity Intervals
Every 3,000 Miles (5000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis
Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Drive
Axle Service (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. Front
Wheel Bearing Repack (2WD only) (or at each brake
relining, whichever occurs first).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000km): Engine
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap
and Lines Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure tofollow thecomplete maintenanceschedule
on thefollowing pages.
Maintenance Schedule
c
Trip/Highway
LongDefinition
1ILong Trip/Highway Intervals
I
Follow this maintenance schedule
only if none of the
conditions from the Short
Trip/City Maintenance
Schedule is true. Do not use this scheduleif the vehicle
is used for trailertowing, driven in a dusty areaor used
off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City schedule for
these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engine oil to break
down slowel:
I
7-6
Every 7,500 Miles (12500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or every12 months, whichever
occurs first). Drive Axle Service.Tire Rotation.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Air CleanerFilter Replacement. Front
Wheel Bearing Repack (2WD only).(orat eachbrake
relining, whichever occursfirst).
Every 50,000 Miles (83000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. FuelTank, Cap and
Lines Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km):Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240000 km):Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occursfirst).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule
on thefollowing pages.
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
( 166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The servicesshown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance inspections” following.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during
tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspection” in Part C of this schedule.
** Drive axle service (see“Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants’’ in the Index for proper lubricantto use):
0
Footnotes
? The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability priorto the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervalsand the maintenance
be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension,ball joints, steering
linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking
brake
cable guides, propshaft splines,universal joints and
brake pedal springs.
Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refillat first
engine oil change.At subsequent oil changes, check
fluid level andadd fluid as needed. If driving in
dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
a Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
fluid as needed at every oil change. If driving in
dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid andrefill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
0
More frequent lubrication may be required for
heavy-duty or off-road use.
/.
. .-
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
.
3,000 Miles (5000 km)
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change
3 months, whichever occurs first).
engineoil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and
add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote * *.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
.'
-I -. .
"3
BY:
components(or every
3 months; whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
E
as needed. Check constant velocityjoints and i
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote ** .)
0Rotate tires. See "Tire Inspection and
Rotation" in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
,
BY:
I
if:'
7-8
.. .'
0Lubricate chassis
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
" E
.<
.,I
I
WW&%
,a%
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
DATE
i
ACTUAL,MILEAGE
'
SERVICED BY:
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
AI?E~nissioi-~
Control Sen7ic.t).
Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Inspect air cleaner filter if you are
driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
if necessary.
AI? Emissiorz Com-ol Sen~ico.(See footnote?. j
7-10
0Check redfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
CJ Change
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components(or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote#.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote *?)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspectionand
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate
chassis components(or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
17 Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
Arz Emission Control Service.
Arz Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote :$?j
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
7-12
-
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Lubricate chassis components (,orevery
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote *?)
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
A n Emissiorz Colztrol Service.
An Emissiorz Control Senice.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(,See footnote #.)
0Check rear/front axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
[7 Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.>
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote ?)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
1
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or
every
3 months, whichever occurs firstj.
An Emissiorl Ccmtrol Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid leveI and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(:Seefootnote ‘ V )
17 For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are
driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
if necessary.
A n Emission Cuntml Ser~~icr.
(See footnote?.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
A
7-16
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
IJ Change automatic transmission fluid and
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (orevery
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0Check readfront axle fluid leveland add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote* *.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
1
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one ormore of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90 O F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
(Continued)
BY
7-17
1
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
50,000 Miles (83 000 km) (Continued)
I
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months?whichever occurs first).
AH E~nissionControl Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote :?)
DATE
7-18
ACTUAL h'lILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components(or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
0Rotate tires. See ”Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional infQrmation.
(See footnote +.)
Cl Lubricate
chassis components(or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0Check readfront axlefluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
7-19
I
Short TripKity MaintenanceSchedule
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
CI Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (,orevery
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote** .)
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
c]Replace fuel filter. Afz Enzissiorz Contml Sen?ice.
(See footnote?.)
7-20
I
0Replace air cleaner filter.
AI! Ewission Control Service.
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
AI? Ewis.sim Comol Service. (See footnote?.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY.
63,000 Miles.(€OS000 knt)
[7 Change
engine oil and fi3ter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
$0Lubricate chassis components(or every
I
~~
~
~
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Errlission. Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
I
DATE
7-22
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED B Y 1
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or
every
0Check
readfront axlef llid
~ le.vel andadd
fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote* *.)
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service,
0Lubricate chassis components(or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
CI For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are
driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-23
I Short TripKity MaintenanceSchedule 1
~~
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
0Change
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
CI Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
Arz Emission Control Service.
c] Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote ‘?)
DATE
7-24
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
t]Lubricate chassisComponents (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
I7 Lubricate chassis components (orevery
(See footnote#.)
Check readfront axle fluid leveland add
fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspectionand
Rotation” in the Index for properrotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY:
~
~
I
1
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
[7 Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axlesealsfor leaking.
(See footnote **.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY:
7-25
1
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0Change
engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
An Emissiorl. Control Ser-tpice.
Replace air cleaner filter.
Replace fuel filter.
Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote ‘?)
@ For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining. whichever occursfirst).
An Emission C o m d Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
C ‘
I
7-26
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
]SERVICED
BYI
~~~
~
~~
rShort Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
Change engineoil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
El Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
I
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (orevery
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspectionand
Rotation” in the Index for properrotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote+.)
7-27
1
ShortTrip/CityMaintenanceSchedule
I
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Inspect spark plug wires.
3 months, whichever occurs first).
Arz Emission Control Serlice.
0 Replace spark plugs.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
I
DATE
7-28
ACTUAL MILEAGE
An Emissiorl Control Service.
SERVICED BY.
A n Emission CmtroI Service.
0Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or ~nountainousterrain.
Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule
I
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
0Drain, flush and refill cooling system
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
(or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
cooling system and pressure cap.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under- any of
these conditions, thefluid and filter do not
require changing.
Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
0Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation
(Pcv)valve. An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
An Emission Control Service.
BY
I
DATE
1
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
ISERVICED BY:l
7-29
The services shown in this schedule up to 100.000 miles
( 166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
( 166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150.OOO miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150.0OO miles (240 000 km ).
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
See "Owner Checks and Services" and "Periodic
Maintenance Inspections" following.
rotation. See "Brake System Inspection" under "Periodic
Maintenance Inspections" in Part C of this schedule.
Footnotes
** Drive axle service (see "Recommended Fluids and
-f- The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item. will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle's useful life. We. however.
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
7-30
linkage and transfer case shift linkage. parking brake
cable guides. propshaft splines. universal joints and
brake pedal springs.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
Lubricants" in the Index for proper lubricant to use):
Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check
fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
fluid as needed at every engine oil change.
More frequent lubrication may be required for
heavy-duty or off-road use.
I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
0Change engine oiland filter (or every
17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote+.)
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (orevery
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote#.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level
and add
fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
I
I
DATE
1
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-31
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (,or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Co~rr-01
Senlicp.
CI Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#. )
Check readfront axle fluid level and add
tluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote ‘M .)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-33
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0Change engine o i l and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
Alz
Emission Control Srl-\,im.
Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote ‘?)
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relinine, whichever occurs first).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
G Replace fuel filter.
1-11] ~ I 1 1 i s s i o nC017fld ~er-\l;c~t..
(See footnote?.)
0.Replace air cleaner filter.
A17 E~H~.F.Y;OII
Control Sc.l-1-ic.c..
L.,
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
1 Long Tripmighway Maintenance
Schedule
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
tT] Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(,Seefootnote +.)
An Ewissiorz Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote ?)
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-35
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months. whichever occurs first).
Ar1 Ernissio/z Cor~tmlSenvice.
C
I Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(‘Seefootnote V )
DATE
7-36
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
El Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
I
If you do not use your vehicle under any of
these conditions, the fluid and filter do not
require changing.
Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
7-37
I
Long Tripmighway MaintenanceSchedule
I
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months. whichever occurs first).
An Emissiorl Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every
I2 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check rearhont axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote W . )
7-38
0Rotate tires. Se.e “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
Long TripMighway Maintenance Schedule
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
0Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0Replace air cleaner filter.
Atz Emission Corzrt-olService.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months. whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote :?)
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
Rotate tires. See "Tire Inspection and
Rotation" in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
0 Inspect ensins accessory drive belt.
(See footnote?.)
An Emission Control Service.
0:Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Eruission Ccmt-d Service. (See footnote-f..)
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
ISERVICED B Y
I
I
67,500 Miles (I12 500 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Ernissiorz Corzfrol Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote ‘B *.)
DATE
7-40
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
I
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
Ai1
Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
c]Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote *?)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-41
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
U Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emissiorl Contrd Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months. whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote *?)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire rnspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Replace fuel filter.
12 months, whichever occurs first).
A I ZEmission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
An Elnission Control Service.
Replace air cleaner filter.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
17 Check rearlfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
[7 For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
AFZEmissiorz Control Service.
Cl Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
7-43
I
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
I
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0Chanqe engine oil and filter (or every
0Inspect spark plug wires.
L.
12 months. whichever occurs first).
,411 Emission
AJIEmis.sio/l Coutrol Sen9ice.
C'otItrd Service.
0Replace spark plugs.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
A J IEmissior1 Co~~tr-ol
Service.
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote '?)
0Rotate tires. See "Tire Inspection and
Rotation" in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
7-44
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED HI':
0Change automatic transmission fluid and
I
filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90" F
(32°C) orhigher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
I50,OOO Miles (240 000 km)
If you
donot use your vehicle under anyof
these conditions, the fluid and filter do not
require changing.
Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation
(PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Sewice.
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY: I
0Drain, flush and refill cooling system
(or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-45
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
Listed below are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@
coolant mix if necessary. See "Engine Coolant" in the
Index for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones. as shown in
Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if
necessarv. See "Windshield Washer Fluid" in the Index
for furthkr details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Engine Oil Level Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. See
"Tires" in the Index for further details.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See "Engine Oil" in the Index for
further details.
Cassette Deck Service
7-46
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See "Audio Systems" in the
Index for further details.
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety beltsystem from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look forany opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Manual Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
“Manual Transmission’’ in the Index. Check for leaks.
A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected and repaired if needed.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level;add if needed. See
“Automatic Transmission” in the Index. A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if needed.
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir. See
“Hydraulic Clutch Fluid”in the Index. A fluid loss in
this system could indicate a problem.Have the system
inspected and repaired at once.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door and fuel door hinges, rear
compartment hinges, latchesand locks including the
glove box, console doorsand the body hood and any
moving seat hardware. Lubricatethe hood safety lever
pivot and prop rod pivot. Part D tells you what to use.
More frequent lubricationmay be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.
7-47
Starter Switch Check
A CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you orothers could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see ”Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal. and be
ready to turn off the engine imnlediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles. try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).If the starter works in
any other position. your vehicle needs service.
On manual transmission vehicles. put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL (N),
push the clutch down halfway
and try to start the engine. The starter’shoLlld work
only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t
pushed all the way down. your vehicle needs service.
7-48
Brake-”kansmission Shift Interlock(BTSI) Check
(Automatic Transmission)
I A CAUTION:
When you are doing thischeck, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, youor others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
’.
Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked o n a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see ”Parking Brake’‘
in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3 . With the engine off. turn the key to the R U N
position, but don‘t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake. try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI
needs service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
0
0
With an automatic transmission, the key should turn
to LOCK only when the shift lever isin PARK (P).
With a manual transmission, the key should turn to
LOCK only when the shift lever is in REVERSE (R).
On vehicles with a key release button, try to turn the key
to LOCK without pressing the button. The key should
turn to LOCK only when you press the key button.
On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
PARK (P)Mechanism Check
I A CAUTION:
~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~~
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or otherscould be
injured and propertycould be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake atonce should thevehicle begin to move.
~
~
~
~
~
_
~
~~
_
~
_
_
~
~
~
~
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running andtransmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shiftto PARK (P). Then
release all brakes.
7-49
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed below are inspections and services which should
be performed at least twice a year (for instance. each
spring and fall). You should let your GM dealer's
service department or other qualified service center do
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at cme.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a CM service manual. See "Service and Owner
Publications" in the Index.
Steering, Suspensionand Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front m d rear suspension and steering
system for datna_ced.loose or missing parts. signs of
wear or lack o f lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks. chafing. ctc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle hoot seals for dm~age.tears or leakage. Replace
seal5 if nccessq'.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged.
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes. loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See "Engine Exhaust" in
the Index.
Radiator and HeaterHose Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed.
Throttle Linkage Inspection
Inspect the throttle linkaze for interference or binding.
and for damage or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any cables that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise
control cables.
Drive AxleService
Check readfront axle fluid level and add
as needed.
Check constant velocity joints
and axle sealsfor leaking.
Transfer Case (All-WheelDrive) Inspection
Every 12 months or at oil change intervals, check front
axle and transfer case and add lubricant
when necessary.
Check vent hose at transfer case for kinksand
proper installation.
nansfer Case (Four-wheel Drive)
Inspection
Every 12 months or at oil change intervals, check front
axle and transfer case and add lubricantwhen necessary.
Check vent hose at transfer case for kinksand proper
installation. More frequent lubrication may be required
on off-road use.
Brake System Inspection (Two-Wheeland
Four-wheel Drive)
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc.Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition.Also inspect drum brake linings
for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers,parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have
your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits
or conditions result in frequent braking.
Brake System Inspection(All-Wheel-Drive)
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition.Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers,parking brake, etc. Check parking
brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes
inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions
result in frequent braking.
7-51
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from your
GM dealer.
USAGE
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines ”Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity. To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
50/50 mixture of clean water
(preferably distilled) and use only
GM Goodwrench@ DEX-COOL
or Havoline@DEX-COOL
coolant. See “Engine Coolant“ in
the Index.
TM
7-52
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Coolant
Supplement
Sealer
GM Part No. 3634621 or
equivalent with a complete flush
and refill.
Hydraulic Brake
System
Delco Supreme 1 1a Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
Hydraulic Clutch Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part
System
No. 12345347 or equivalent
DOT-3 brake fluid).
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Chassis lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Power Steering
System
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM
Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
lOSOOl7 - 1 quart. or equivalent).
USAGE
Manual
Transmission
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Synchromesh Transmission
Fluid (GM Part No. 12345349
or equivalent).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON@-I11Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Pu oselubricant,
Superlube% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent)or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
USAGE
Transfer Case
DEXRON@-I11Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Windshield
Washer Solvent
GM Optikleen@Washer
~
Front Wheel
Bearings
Differential,
Front and Rear
Axle
Wheel bearing lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category GC or GC-LB (GM Part
No. 105 1344 or equivalent).
Axle Lubricant (GM Part
No. 1052271) or SAE 8OW-90
GL-5 Gear Lubricant.
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Solvent (GM PartNo. 10515 15)
or equivalent.
~~~
Transfer Case
Shift Lever,
Propeller Shaft
Slip Splinesand
Universal Joints
Chassis lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or,equivalent)or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI ## 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Clutch Pushrod
to ClutchFork
Joint
Chassis lubricant (GMPart
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Constant
Velocity
Universal Joint
Chassis lubricant(GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
7-53
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate lubricant aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and
Door Hinges
Multi-purpose lubricant.
Superlube’ (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Tailgate
Mounted Spare
Tire Carrier (if
equipped), Outer
Tailgate Handle
Pivot Points and
Hinges
Multi-pu oselubricant,
%
(GM
I
Part
Superlube
No. 1234624 1 or equivalent).
7-54
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease(GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Multi-purpose lubricant,
Superlube‘ (GM Part
No. 1234624 1 or equivalent).
See “Replacement Parts” in the Index for recommended
replacement filters, valves and spark plugs.
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed,
record the
date, odometer readingand who performed the service
in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.
Any additional informationfrom “Owner Checks and
Services’’ or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on
the following recordpages. Also, you should retain all
maintenance receipts.Your owner information portfolio
is a convenient place to store
them.
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-55
Maintenance Record
7-56
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section alsotells you how to obtain
service publications andhow to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-9
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Address for Writing to Chevrolet/Geo
Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users
Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance Program
Phone Number for RoadsideAssistance
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Chevrolet/Geo Courtesy Transportation
BBB Autoline Information
~
~
8-10
8-10
8-1 1
8-11
8-1 1
8- 12
8- 13
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defectsto the United States
Reporting Safety Defects to Canada
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Service Publicationsin Canada
How to Order Service Publications
Order Form for Service Publications
8-1
Customer SatisfactionProcedure
Chevrolet dealers have the facilities, trained technicians
and up-to-date information to promptly address any
concerns you may have. However, if a concern has not
been resolved to your complete satisfaction, take the
following steps:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the Sales, Serviceor Parts
Manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
General Manager.
'I
....."---
c
8-2
I
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a memberof
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolvedby the dealership without further
help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-222- 1020. In Canada,
contact GM of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
For help outside of the United States and Canada, call
the following numbers as appropriate:
In Mexico: (525) 625-3256
0
0
In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135
(English) or 1-800-75 1-4136 (Spanish)
In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122
In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763- 1315
In other overseas locations, call GM International
Product Center in Canada at:(905) 644-41 12.
In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
8-3
For prompt assistance, please have the following
information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
0
Your name, address, home and business
telephone numbers
0
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at
the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
Nature of concern
0
0
0
We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry
prompt attention. However, if you wish to write
Chevrolet, address your inquiry to:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada. write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre. 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L 1H 8P7
8-4
Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information booklet for addresses of
GM Overseas offices.
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership,
using the dealer’s facilities, equipmentand personnel.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (,TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Chevrolet/Geo Roadside
Assistance Program
Roadside Assistanceis available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872). This toll-free numberwill provide
you over-the-phone roadside assistancewith minor
mechanical problems. If your problem cannot be
resolved over the phone, our advisorshave access to a
nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membershipis free, however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levelsof service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy” Care:
a
a
a
a
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitmentto customer
satisfaction, Chevroletis excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 1997 Chevrolet/Geo,
membership in Roadside Assistance is free.
Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA
Free towing for warranty repairs
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer servicesat reasonable costs (ie.,
wrecker services, locksmith/key service, glass
repair, etc.)
ROADSIDE Courtesy
0
Care PROVIDES:
Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined above)
Plus:
FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
0
FREE LocksrnithKey Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
0
FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
0
FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
0
FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on
the road)
Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportation for
customers needing warranty service. Courtesy
Transportation will be offered in conjunction with
the coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper
New Vehicle Limited Warranty to eligible purchasers
of 1997 Chevrolet/Geo passenger car and light duty
trucks. (Please see your selling dealer for details.)
Note: Colmesy Care is available to Retail and Retail Lease
Customers operating 1997 and newer ChevroletlGeo
vehicles for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000km),
whichever occurs first.All Corlrtes! Curr services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
Service Management.
Basic Cure and Corwtesy Care are not part of or
included i n the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Cmrtesy Ccm
at any time.
8-6
Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure
For complete program details, see your ChevroledGeo
dealer to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure. inside your owner information portfolio forfull
program details.
The Roadside Assistance Centeruses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When Canadian Roadside Assistance
roadside services are required, our advisorswill explain
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
any payment obligations that may be incurred for
Roadside Assistance program accessiblefrom anywhere
utilizing outside services.
in Canada or the United States. Please referto the
For prompt assistance when calling, please havethe
separate brochure provided by the dealer orcall
following available to give to the advisor:
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
0
License plate number
Vehicle color
0
Vehicle location
Telephone number where you can be reached
0
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportation for
customers needing warranty service. Courtesy
Transportation will be offered in conjunction with the
coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper New
Vehicle Limited Warranty to retail purchasers of
1997 Chevrolet/Geo passenger cars and light duty
trucks (please see your selling dealer for details).
Courtesy Transportation includes:
0 One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair
completed during the same day.
0
0
U p to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance
for any overnight warranty repair up to five days, OR
Up to $30 maximum daily cab. bus or other
transportation allowance in lieu of rental for any
overnight warranty repair up to five days, OR
Up t o S I O daily tuel allowance. for rides provided by
amother person t i .e.. friend. neighbor. etc.) in lieu of
rental for any c n m i g h t warranty repair up to five days.
Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will
be adtnit7istt'red by your Chevrolet/Geo dealer
ser\.ice tnanaFement. Claim amounts should reflect
a l l actual
8-8
COSlS.
Chevrolet/Geo Courtesy Transportation is not part
of the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Chevrolet/Geo reserves the right to make
any changes or discontinueCourtesy Transportation
at any time without notification.
For additional program details, contact your
Chevrolet/Geo dealer.
Some state insuranceregulations make it impractical to
rent vehicles to people under 21 years of age. If you are
under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Chevrolet
will reimburse up to $30/day for documented
transportation you receive.
For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle
Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
interim transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details. TheRoadside Assistance program is
available only in the United States and Canada.
In Canada, please consult your GM dealer for
information on Courtesy Transportation.
GM Participation inan Alternative
Dispute ResolutionProgram
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system to
is available
settle automotive disputes. This program
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Canadian ownersrefer to your Warranty
and Owner Assistance Informationbooklet for
information onthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP). General Motorsreserves the right to
change eligibility limitationsand/or to discontinue its
participation in this program.
free of charge to customerswho currently own or lease
a
GM vehicle.
Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed
to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. Our experience has shown that, if a situation
arises where you feel your concernhas not been
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
described earlier in this section is very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement
regarding vehicle repairsor interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participates
in
BBB AUTO LINE.
If you are not satisfied after followingthe Customer
Satisfaction Procedure,you may contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203- 1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100
To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and a statementof the nature of your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.
8-9
We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you
may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt
to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary. If
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will
be scheduled where eligible customers may present their
case to an impartial third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make a decision which you may
accept or reject. If you accept the decision. GM will be
bound by that decision. The entire dispute resolution
procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from the
time you file a claim until a decision is made.
Some state laws may require you to use this program
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program
or in the courts. For further information, contact the
BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222- 1020.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause in-jury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an
investigation. and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington. D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect,you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, OntarioK 1G 352
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation likethis, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please callus at 1-800-222- 1020 or write:
In Canada, please callus at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manualsand
other service literature are available for purchase for
all
current and past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephonenumber for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, Michigan 48007-7047
8-11
1997 CHEVROLET/GEO SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING
INFORMATH
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased
by filling o
the Service Publication Order Form in thisbook and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1997 CHEVROLET/GEO
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have thediagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about tl
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenanct
Schedule for all models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE,TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
1997 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $40.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THEORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $10.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.
OR ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCarcCDiscover
Orders willbe mailed within O.days
1
of receipt. Please allow ade uate time for postal
service. If further informatlon IS needed, wrlte to the address s own below or call
1-800-782-4356.Materialcannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return
information within30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
against the original order.
R
ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)
1-800-782-4356
(Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927
PUBLICATION FORM
NUMBER
ITEM DESCRIPTION
I
,
VEHICLE MODEL
NAME
- -
YEAR
1997
$90.00
1997
$40.00
Owner’s Manual In Portfolio
1997
$15.00
Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio
1997
$10.00
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please writeto the above address for quotation.
P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(STATE)
(CITY)
.
.
DAYTlMf TELEPHONE NO.
CODE)
(ZIP
0
AREA CODE
iE-ORD97
Check or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
only do not send cash.)
‘(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
I
TOTAL
MATERIAL
TOTAL
PRICE
I
Michigan Purchasers
add 6% sales tax
P
A 0MasterCard
Canadian Postage
See Note Below
Y
VISA
M
Discover
E Account
Number:
N Expiration 1 7
Checkhere if yourbillingaddress
is different fromyour shipping
Date mo/yr:
address shown.
T
Note to Canadian Customers:All listed pricesare quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
lm
(AITEMION)
(STREET ADDRESS-NO
PRICE
EACH*
Service Manual
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer
or companyname, and also the
name of the personto whose attention the shipment should be sent.
(CUSTOMERS
NAME)
QTYm
ml
m
l
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
plus the
are to make checks payablein U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11.50
U.S. order processing.
4% NOTES
8-14
Section 9 Index
Accessory Power Outlets ........................
2-63
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . 6-3
3-20
Adding Sound Equipment ........................
Add-on Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
AirBag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20
Adding Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-25
How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
1-22
How it Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 1-21. 2-73
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1-23
What Makes it Intlate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1-23
When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-64
Alignment and Balance, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-46
2-23, 6-21
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
Antenna. Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 2-76, 4-7
6-49
Appearancecare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-57
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armrest. Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axle
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-9
2-56
2-61
3-6
2-20
7-47
6-14
2-18
7-49
2-18
2-15
6-22
6-20
Backglass Wipers. Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32
2-73
ChargeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Replacement. Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3. 5-5
BBB Auto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-9
Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
9-1
Blizzard. Driving In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
2-29
Brake. Parking .................................
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Brakes
Adjustment ..................................
6-32
Anti-Lock ...................................
4- 7
6-28
Master Cylinder ..............................
PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Replacing System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 9
Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock Check . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
4- 6
Braking ........................................
Braking in Emergencies ...........................
4-9
2-13
Break-In, NewVehicle ..........................
Brightness Control ..............................
2-47
BTSICheck ...................................
7-48
6-33, 6-62
Bulb Replacement .........................
Canadian Roadside Assistance ....................
8-7
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63, 6-64
CarbonMonoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9.2-34.4-49, 4-50
Cargocover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-58
Cargo Tie Downs ...............................
2-58
Center Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
4-42
CertificatiodTire Label ..........................
Chains
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
6-48
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2
Changing a Flat Tire.............................
5-23
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73
Check Gages Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . :. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Chemical Paint Spotting ..........................
6-56
ChildRestraints ................................
1-37
Center Seat Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position........... 1-39
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Where Not to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
WheretoPut ................................
1-37
CigaretteLighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
6-59
Circuit Breakers and Fuses .......................
6-13
Cleaner.Air ...................................
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ............................
6-55
Fabric ......................................
6-50
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53
6-49
Inside of Your Vehicle .........................
Instrumentpanel .............................
6-52
Leather .....................................
6-52
Outside of Your Vehicle ........................
6-54
Stains ......................................
6-51
Tires .......................................
6-55
Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Weatherstrips ................................ 6-53
Wheels ......................................
6-45
Windshield, Backglass and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Climate Control System ...........................
3-2
Clock. Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
Clutch. Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6- 19
Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 1
CompactDisc Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
5-35
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Convex Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-50
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14. 6-23
Coolant Heater. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2- 17
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8
CruiseControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- I
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
Damage. Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-56
Damage. Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-46
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
DeadBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Defects. Reporting Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- IO. 8- 1 I
DefensiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
3-5
Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Dimensions.Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
DomeLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Door
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Drive. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Drive Axle Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-32
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-35
InaBlizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-39
Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
OnCurves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
Rainy Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-29
Snowy and Icy Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-37
Through Deep Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
WetRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-29
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-37
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Driving On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
E a s y Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Equipment, Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20.
ElectricalSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Endgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ManualRelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RemoteRelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
6-58
6-58
2-9
2-11
2-10
2-11
9-3
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FanNoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engineoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kind to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust.Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Express-Down Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Metal Parts. Protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
2- 17
7-46
3-76
2-34
5-22
6-58
7-46
5-12
2-35
6-63
2-15
6-9
6-10
6- 12
6-9
6-10
2-79
6-13
6-12
2-34
3-36
6-55
F a b r i c Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50
Fifth Gear. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
FillingYourTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5
Fi 1ter
Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Remote Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 12
9-4
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
6-56
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First Gear
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-20
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-21
5-2
Flashers . Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat Tire. Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23
Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-64. 7-52
FogLampSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-47
Foreign Countries. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Fourth Gear, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Four-wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-23, 6-21..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . .11
French Language Manual
FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
2-48
Front ivlap Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47. 2-5 1.6-38
Front Sidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Front Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
FrontTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10
Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-81
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-59
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-76
2-79
2-81
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5 1
GasCap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Gate Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-81
GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
GearPositions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-18
GloveBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-50
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-43
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42..
Guide en Franpis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-42
6-33
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
2-45
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-33
2-39
HighLow Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-46
6-59
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
4-35
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-35
4-48
Hitches. Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6- I9
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-47
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-31
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
6.41.7.46
Inflation. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Inspections
7-51
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-50
Front Drive Axle Boot Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-50
7-50
Radiator and Heater Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
7-50
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Throttle Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-50
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-51
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-67
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-52
2-69
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-47
Jacking Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
K e y in the Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
Key Lock Cylinders Service ......................
7-47
Key Release Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
2-6
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
9-5
Labels
Certificatioflire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
6-60
Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SafetyBelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-48
Service Parts Identification .....................
6-58
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
2-45
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-48
Front Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2.47. 2.51
Front Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2-46
OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Latches. Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
Leaving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-32
Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-61
Lights
Air Bag Readiness .......................
1-2 1. 2.73
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.76.4.7
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
2-73
ChargingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CheckGages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Gate Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Safety Belt Reminder ......................
1-9. 2-72
Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Shitt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22, 2-80
Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-42
2-23
Locking Rear A x l e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LockoutSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-37
9-6
Locks .........................................
2-4
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
7-47
Key Lock Cylinder Service .....................
2-5
PowerDoor ..................................
Rear Door Security .............................
2-5
Steering Column Park Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
Lubricants and Fluids .......................
6.64. 7.52
Lubrication Service. Body ........................
7-47
2-59
Luggagecarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3. 1-4
LumbarControls ............................
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-55
7-1
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Long Trip/Highway .......................
7.6.7.30
Owner Checks and Services .....................
7-46
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.57.
.7
Short Trip/City ............................
Maintenance. Underbody .........................
6-56
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ......................
2-77
ManualFront Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
ManualLumbar Support ..........................
1-3
Manual Transmission
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-47
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-21
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convex Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside Daymight Rearview .....................
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VisorVanity .................................
Model Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multifunction Lever .............................
6-4
2-49
2-50
2-49
2-49
2-62
vi
4-35
2-38
N e t . Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Neutral
Automatic Transmission .......................
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Vehicle “Break-In” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-57
2- 19
2-22
2- 13
4-28
6-63
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Off-RoadDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 1 1
0il.Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Opener. Garage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Ordering Owner and Smite Publications . . . . . . . 8- 1 I. 8- 12
Outside Mirror
Manual Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Power Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Overdrive. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Overheating Engine .............................
5-12
Owner Checks and Services .......................
7-46
Owner Publications ........................
8- 1 1. 8. 12
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park
Automatic Transmission .......................
Shifting Into .................................
Shifting Out of ...............................
Parking
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Mechanism Check .......................
Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On Hills with a Trailer .........................
Over Things That Burn ........................
Your Vehicle. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power
Accessory Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Control Mirror ........................
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Powerseat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lumbar Controls ..............................
6-56
2-18
2-30
2-33
2-12
2-29
7-49
2-12
4-52
2-34
2-33
4-12
4-44
7-50
2-63
2-5
2-49
4-9
6-26
2-36
1-3
1-4
Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
Problems on the Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Publications. Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 I . 8- 12
Radiator. Adding Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5- 19
Radiator Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- I9
Radios
AM-FM Stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
Cassette Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20? 7-46
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8. 3- 10
Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3- 13
Theft-Deterrent Feature. CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 17
Rain. Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-29
Rear
Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Safety Belt Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 1
Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-28
1-7
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
Window WasheriWi per . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
RearSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -49
1-4
Reclining Front Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . 6-64.7-52
Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37
Recovery Tank . Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- I6
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-41
-
9-8
Replacement
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
6-63
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8- 10. 8-11
Restraints
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-47
1-47
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-37
1-6
Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
Reverse
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2-22
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RightFront Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-36
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7
Rocking Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Rotation. Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
1-8
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-52
Center Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Center Rear Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-35 . 1-44
1-13
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-47
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HowtoWear Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
LapBelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27 . 1-33
Lap-Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.13. 1.28
Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.I2
Rear Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 1
Rear Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-28
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-48
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
WhyThey Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-9
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-49
Safety Defects. Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 10. 8- I...1
Safety Warnings and Symbols .......................
III
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4
Seatback
1-6
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RecliningFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................
1-1
Second Gear
2-20
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 1
Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6- 1
Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 1. 8. 12
Service Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Service Work. Doing Your Own ....................
6-2
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Sheet MetalDamage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.22. 2.80
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1 8. 2.21
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 2-30
OutofPark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-33
SignalingTurns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-39
SIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20
Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.63. 6.64
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-71
Stains. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-51
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-48
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
Steering
In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
Steering Column Park Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Steering Wheel. Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-38
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-50
Storage.Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-33
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
SunVisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-62
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-63
SupplementalInflatableRestraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Symbols. Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-71
Taillamp Bulb Replacement .......................
6-37
TapePlayerCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Temperature and Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
..
.
9-9
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
THEFTLOCK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
6-26
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Third Gear. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 1
Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-38
3-6
Time. Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-48
Tires
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-46
6-44
BuyingNew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-41. 7-46
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-42
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-41
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-46
6-46
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-45
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-45
Uniform Quality Grading
Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
When It’s Time for New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-44
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-38
2-32
TorqueLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque, Wheel Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-32, 6-63
4-45
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing, Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-41
5-7
Towing YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
TI(
9-10
4-52
Driving on Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-50
Driving with a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-48
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance When Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-54
Parking on Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Tongueweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-47
4-48
Total Weight on Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-51
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-46
Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-55
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
2-26
Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-24
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Fluid
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
6-18
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmitters . Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Transportation. Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8
Trip. Before Leaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-34
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
8-4
TTYUsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-56
Underhood Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Universal Transmitter ............................
Erasing Channels .............................
Operation ...................................
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rolling Code Openers .........................
Used Replacement Wheels ........................
2-64
2-66
2-66
2-65
2-66
6-47
Vanity Mirror Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .
VehicleControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Damage Warnings ..........................
VehicleDimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Identification Number .....................
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visors. Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-38
4-6
iv
6-64
6-58
4-42
6-33
w a r n i n e Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Eights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer Fluid. Windshield ........................
WashingYourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
2-72
8- I O
6-27
6-54
v
3-4
2-62
2-74
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Alignment ...............................
Wheel Nut Torque .........................
5.32.
WheelReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows
Express-Down ...............................
LockoutSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Swing-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WindshieldWasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Check ............................
WindshieldWiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bladecheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BladeReplacement ...........................
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring.Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-53
6-46
6.63
6-46
2-36
2-37
2-36
2-36
2-37
2-40
6-27
7-46
2-40
7-47
6-38
6-59
2-41
4-37
6-59
5-7
9-11
Service Station Checkpoints
TIRES
P6-41
ENGINE COOLANT
RECOVERY TANK
P6-23
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
P6-9
4
SECONDARY
HOOD RELEASE
P6-6
I 1
I f
1
I
II
\I
WINDSHIELD
WASHER FLUID
P6-27
HOOD RELEASE
P6-6
FUEL DOOR
P6-5
For detailed information, refer to the page number listed, or see the index in the back of the owner's manual.
9-12
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising